JP6506319B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine capable of generating a special gaming state for providing a gaming value advantageous to a player.

  In a conventional pachinko gaming machine, a game is executed based on the winning of the start winning opening arranged in the gaming area, and a special game is given a gaming value to the player when the result of the game becomes a specific result mode. It is common for situations to occur.

  Then, as such a gaming machine, there is a gaming machine in which a game ball flowing down a channel on the right side of the gaming board can win by turning the door of the variable winning device in the lateral direction (for example, Patent Document 1) reference).

JP, 2015-19733, A

  However, in the above gaming machine, when the variable winning device is in the closed state, the game ball which flows down the right channel and collides with the door of the variable winning device from the diagonal lateral direction is a channel below the variable winning device. It is not something that can be effectively guided towards the

  Therefore, it is an object of the present invention to provide a gaming machine capable of effectively guiding a game ball by the door of the variable winning device when the door of the variable winning device is in a closed state.

In a typical embodiment of the present invention, a gaming machine provided with a flow path through which gaming balls can flow is provided with a variable winning device having an open / close member convertible into an open state and a closed state, and facing the flow path One side surface of the opening and closing member has a long side portion and a short side portion connected to the long side portion, and the flow path is a flow path wall capable of guiding the game ball toward the opening and closing member The tip of the flow path wall faces one side of the opening and closing member, and a space larger than the diameter of the gaming ball is formed between the tip and the opening and closing member in the open state, The flow path wall is characterized in that the gaming ball is guided to the long side without interposing an obstacle nail between the tip end and the open / close member in the closed state.

  According to one aspect of the present invention, the game ball can be effectively guided by the door of the variable winning device.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. FIG. 2 is a perspective view of a gaming board unit and a control device unit, which are the main components of the gaming machine. It is a disassembled perspective view of a control device unit. It is a front view of the control device unit in which each movable part is in operation or in an operation position. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 1st movable service item unit. It is a front view of the 1st movable role unit in which the 1st movable role item is in the initial position. It is a front view of the 1st movable prize unit in which the 1st movable prize is in an operation position. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 2nd movable service item unit. It is a rear view of a 2nd movable character item unit. It is a top view of a 2nd movable character item unit. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 3rd movable service item unit. It is a top view of a 3rd movable character item unit. It is a time chart explaining an example of the operation timing of the 2nd movable prize and the 3rd movable prize. It is a time chart explaining another example of the operation timing of the 2nd movable prize and the 3rd movable prize. It is a time chart explaining an example of the operation timing of the 2nd movable prize and the 3rd movable prize after electric power support. It is a front view of the game board which explains the operation of the right hitting period and the 2nd movable prize and the 3rd movable prize. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 4th movable service item unit. It is a rear view of the raising and lowering unit in which the raising and lowering unit is in the initial position. It is a rear view of the raising and lowering unit in which the raising and lowering unit is in the operating position. It is a rear view of the 4th movable character article back base in which a lift unit is in an initial position. It is a rear view of the 4th movable character article back base in which a lift unit is in an operation position. It is a figure explaining an example of the light emission mode of a light-guide plate. It is an expanded sectional view of a light guide plate. It is an expanded sectional view of another example of a light-guide plate. It is a figure explaining the case where two light-guide plates are provided. It is a front view of two light guide plates. It is a front view of the 1st light guide plate explaining the luminescence mode in the case of making LED emit light in the longitudinal direction one by one. It is a front view of the 2nd light-guide plate explaining the light emission aspect in the case of making LED light-emit sequentially to a horizontal direction. It is a figure explaining the magnitude | size of the refraction | bending part provided in a light-guide plate. It is a front view of a game board in the state where the 2nd light guide plate is emitting light entirely. It is a disassembled perspective view of a 5th movable service item unit. It is a front view of the 5th movable role unit in which the 5th movable role item is in an initial position. It is a front view of the 5th movable prize unit in which the 5th movable prize is in an operation position. It is a front view of the 5th movable movable object unit of another example in which the 5th movable movable item is in an initial position. It is a front view of the 5th movable movable object unit of another example in which the 5th movable movable item is in the first state. It is a front view of the 5th movable movable object unit of another example whose 5th movable movable item is in the 2nd state. It is a figure explaining an example of the shape of the arm tip part of the 2nd arm. It is a time chart explaining an example of the operation timing of the left hitting instruction effect and the fifth movable combination. It is a time chart explaining the operation | movement timing of a predetermined | prescribed effect and a 5th movable combination. It is a front view of the game board immediately after the electric support state end. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a game control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of an effect control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of main processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an initial value random number update process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of input processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of switch reading processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of an output process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of payment command transmission processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 1. FIG. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the random number update process 2. FIG. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of winning a prize number counter update processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting opening error monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a game machine state check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a payment busy signal check process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a hard random number acquisition process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure starting opening switch common process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of pre-reading big hit judgment processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big winning a prize mouth switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure usual process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 1 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the special figure 2 change start process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a special figure information setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a fluctuation pattern setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of 2-byte distribution processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of distribution processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change start information setting processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing during a special figure change. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of processing under special figure display. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing transition setting processing 1 during fan fare / interval. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of processing during a big winning opening opening. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a big hit end process. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end setting processing 2. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of big hit end setting processing 3. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a production | presentation command setting process. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of design change control processing. It is a flow chart which shows a procedure of common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of gate switch monitoring processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a common drawing normal process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process shift setting process during a common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process in common drawing fluctuation. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process in common drawing display. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a process in common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a general operation start shift setting process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a routine charge residual ball process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the end process per common drawing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a segment LED edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a board | substrate electric wave fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the first half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the latter half part of an external information edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of main prize ball | bowl signal edit processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a starting opening signal edit process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of the main process (main program) performed by a presentation control apparatus. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of reception command check processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of variable system command processing. It is a flow chart which shows the procedure of change production setting processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of big hit system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of pre-reading symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of pre-reading change system command processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of decoration control processing. It is a flowchart which shows the procedure of a light-guide plate control process. It is a chart of the operation speed of the drive source of modification 1 of a 1st embodiment, and the sound which arises from the whole thing. It is a figure which shows the rotation speed of the motor of the modification 1 of 1st Embodiment, the rotation speed of a gear, the operation speed of an accessory, and the magnitude | size of the sound produced from each location. It is a figure explaining the presentation content in reach change of modification 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a figure explaining the contents of an effect in false continuation production (false continuous presentation) of modification 1 of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of modification 2 of a 1st embodiment. It is a disassembled perspective view of the play board unit of the modification 2 of 1st Embodiment. It is a side view of a coloring light transmission board of modification 2 of a 1st embodiment, and the 2nd movable role thing. It is a front view of the display apparatus of the modification 2 of 1st Embodiment, and a coloring light transmission board periphery. It is a front view of the game board of modification 3 of a 1st embodiment. FIG. 31 is an enlarged front view of the right central part of the game board in the closed state of the special variation winning device of the modified example 4 of the first embodiment. It is an enlarged front view of the center part on the right side of the game board in the open state of the special variation winning device of the modification 4 of the first embodiment. It is an enlarged front view of the opening-closing door except decoration of the cherry blossoms of the modification 4 of 1st Embodiment. FIG. 31 is an enlarged front view of the right central part of the game board in the closed state of the special variation winning device of the modified example 4 of the first embodiment. It is an enlarged front view of the center part on the right side of the game board in the open state of the special variation winning device of the modification 4 of the first embodiment. It is an exploded perspective view of the 3rd movable service item unit of modification 5 of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of modification 5 of a 1st embodiment. It is a perspective view of the drive system of the decoration rotary body of another example of modification 5 of a 1st embodiment. It is a front view of the game board of another example of the modification 5 of 1st Embodiment.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. Note that the front, rear, left, and right in the description of the gaming machine refer to the direction viewed from the player in the game.

[General view of gaming machine]
FIG. 1 is a diagram for explaining a gaming machine.

  The gaming machine 10 includes an opening / closing frame attached to the frame 11 fixed to the island facility so as to be openable / closable and pivotable via a hinge. The opening and closing frame is constituted by a front frame 12 (main body frame) and a glass frame 15.

  While the game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is disposed on the front frame 12, a glass frame 15 having a cover glass 14 covering the front of the game board 30 is attached. The cover glass 14 functions as a game visual recognition area that enables visual recognition of the game area 32 (see FIG. 2) formed on the game board 30.

  The front frame 12 and the glass frame 15 can be opened individually. For example, the game area 32 of the game board 30 can be accessed by opening only the glass frame 15. Further, by opening the front frame 12 in a state where the glass frame 15 is not opened, access to the game control device (main board) 100 (see FIG. 42) and the like disposed on the back side of the game board 30 Can.

  Various frame components are disposed at the edge portion of the glass frame 15 around the cover glass 14.

  At the upper center and left side of the glass frame 15, decorative devices 18a and 18b capable of emitting light according to the game state are disposed. The decoration devices 18a and 18b accommodate therein illumination members such as LEDs, and perform light emission effects according to the game state. The illumination members disposed inside the decorative devices 18a and 18b constitute a part of the frame decorative device 18 (see FIG. 43).

  An upper speaker 19a is disposed at the upper right corner and the upper left corner of the glass frame 15, respectively. Two lower speakers 19 b are provided below the gaming machine 10 separately from the upper speakers 19 a. The lower speaker 19 b is disposed at the lower left corner portion of the glass frame 15 and the lower right corner portion of the front frame 12. The upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b emit sound effects, alarm sounds, notification sounds and the like.

  In the right side portion of the glass frame 15, a projection effect unit 13 which is extended in the vertical direction of the gaming machine 10 and which protrudes toward the front (player side) is disposed. The projecting effect unit 13 is an effect device that performs a light emitting effect and the like according to the progressing state of the game. The illumination member disposed inside the projecting effect unit 13 also constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 43).

  An upper tray unit having an upper tray 21 capable of storing gaming balls is attached to the lower portion of the glass frame 15. The upper plate 21 is formed in a box shape whose upper surface is open. The game balls stored in the upper tray 21 are supplied one by one to a ball launcher (not shown).

  The upper unit further includes a rendering operation device for receiving an input operation from a player, a ball lending operation device for receiving an input operation from the player, and a decoration device 22 for performing a light emission effect or the like according to the game state. .

  The effect operating device is an operating device in which the touch panel 25b is incorporated in the effect button 25, and is provided at the upper center of the upper tray unit so that the player can easily operate it.

  By the player operating the effect operating device, it is possible to perform an effect in which the player's operation is intervened in the special view variation display game or the like displayed on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). For example, it is possible to select a rendering pattern (rendering mode) or to execute a preview rendering for previewing in advance the result of the variable display game corresponding to the start memory. Note that the variable display game includes a special view variable display game, and in the case where the variable display game is simply used, this specification refers to the special view variable display game.

  Further, the effect pattern may be changed not only during the execution of the variable display game but also when the player operates the effect operating device during the non-execution.

  The gaming state when the variable display game is executed is composed of a plurality of gaming states. The normal gaming state (normal state) is a gaming state in which no special gaming state has occurred. In addition, the special gaming state is, for example, a time-saving state as a specific gaming state or a state where probability of occurrence of a special result (for example, a big hit) is high in a variable display game (certain change state, probability change state), a big hit state ).

  Here, the definite change state (specific game state) is continued until the next big hit occurs (loop type), and is continued until a predetermined number of variable display games are executed (count cut type, ST), and There are things (continuation lottery type) etc. which continue until it wins a predetermined probability fall lottery.

  Furthermore, it is possible to always generate a positive change state when a big hit occurs, without deciding whether or not to generate a positive change state by a big hit symbol random number, or by providing a winning device etc. provided with a specific area If the gaming ball passes through the area, a definite change state may be generated.

  The ball lending operating device is an operating device operated when a player borrows a game ball, and is provided on the upper right side of the upper tray unit. The ball lending operating device includes a ball lending button 27, a return button 28, and a balance display unit 26. The ball lending button 27 is a button operated by the player when borrowing a game ball, and the return button 28 is a card unit (not shown) disposed adjacent to the gaming machine 10 for discharging a prepaid card or the like. It is a button operated by the player. The balance display unit 26 is a display area in which the balance of a prepaid card or the like is displayed.

  The decoration device 22 accommodates an illumination member such as an LED, etc., and is a device that performs light emission effects and the like according to the game state, and is provided on the front portion of the upper tray unit. The illumination member disposed inside the decoration device 22 constitutes a part of the frame decoration device 18 (see FIG. 4).

  An operation handle 24 for controlling the operation of a ball emitting device (not shown) and a gaming ball can be stored under the glass frame 15 provided with the above-described upper tray unit etc. and under the front frame 12 A lower plate 23 is provided.

  The operation handle 24 is disposed at the lower right portion of the front frame 12 and below the lower speaker 19 b on the right side. When the player rotates the operation handle 24, the ball launcher launches the game ball supplied from the upper tray 21 to the game area 32 of the gaming board 30. The firing speed of the gaming ball to be fired from the ball launching device is set to be faster as the turning operation amount of the operation handle 24 is larger. That is, the ball launcher can change the launch force (speed) for firing the game ball to the game area in accordance with the operation of the operation handle 24 by the player, and the game is performed in various launch modes with different launch rates. I can shoot a ball. In the firing mode, the game ball is allowed to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 (normally hit) and the game ball is allowed to flow down on the right side of the game area 32 (special hit which strikes stronger than usual strike). Is included.

  The lower tray 23 is disposed below the upper tray unit at a predetermined distance from the upper tray unit. The lower plate 23 has a ball removing hole 23a penetrating the bottom of the lower plate 23 in the vertical direction, and an open / close operation unit 23b for opening and closing the ball removing hole 23a. The player operates the opening / closing operation unit 23b to open the ball removing hole 23a, whereby the gaming balls stored in the lower plate 23 can be discharged to the outside through the ball removing hole 23a.

[Play board]
Subsequently, with reference to FIG. 2, the gaming board 30 of the gaming machine 10 will be described. FIG. 2 is a front view of the gaming board 30 provided in the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  As shown in FIG. 2, the game board 30 includes a flat game board main body 30 a that is a mounting base for various members. The game board main body 30a is made of wood or synthetic resin such as acrylic or plastic, and the game area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31 is provided on the front of the game board main body 30a. The game machine 10 is configured to play a game by firing a game ball from a ball launch device into a game area 32 surrounded by the guide rails 31. A windmill, an obstacle nail or the like is disposed in the game area 32 as a member for changing the flowing direction of the game ball, and the launched game ball flows down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by these members. When the game board main body 30a is formed of a transparent or translucent material, a part of the game board main body 30a may be formed of a transparent member. The configuration is visible.

  In the approximate center of the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 is attached which forms a window serving as a display area of the variable display game. Behind the window portion formed in the center case 40, a display device 41 as an effect display device (variation display device) that variably displays (variable display) a plurality of identification information is disposed. The display device 41 includes, for example, a liquid crystal display, and is disposed such that display contents can be viewed from the front side of the game board 30 through the window portion of the center case 40. The display device 41 is not limited to one having a liquid crystal display, and may have a display such as an EL or a CRT.

  A plurality of variable display areas are provided on the display screen (display unit) of the display device 41, and identification information (special symbol) and characters for producing a variable display game are displayed in each of the variable display areas. In addition, an image (a big hit display, a fanfare display, an ending display, etc.) based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  Further, in the center case 40, an inflow port 40a to the warp passage 40e for guiding the gaming balls flowing down the gaming area 32 to the inside of the center case 40, and a stage on which the gaming balls having passed the warp passage 40e can roll. A portion 40b is provided. Since the stage portion 40b of the center case 40 is disposed above the start winning opening unit 101 having the first start winning opening 36 and the third start winning opening 42, the gaming ball rolled on the stage portion 40b is It is easy to win the 1 start winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42.

  An upper rendering unit 40 c is provided on the top of the center case 40. The upper effect unit 40c (which may be a movable combination) constitutes part of the board decoration device 46 (see FIG. 43) and the board effect device 44 (see FIG. 43).

  In the right play area 32 of the center case 40, a six-step flow path 40d is provided for switching the game ball left and right six times, and a general winning opening 35 is provided at the top of the six-step flow path 40d. In addition, in the middle of the six-stage flow path 40d, the special variation winning device 39 is disposed facing the left side of the fifth stage, and at the lowermost portion of the six-stage flow path 40d, a normal symbol starting gate (common view starting gate) 34 are provided. Inside the drawing start gate 34, a gate switch (SW) 34a (see FIG. 42) for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the drawing start gate 34 is provided. When the gaming ball driven into the gaming area 32 passes the common drawing start gate 34, the common drawing variation display game is executed.

  The special variation winning device 39 is a winning device that opens and closes left and right around a lower portion of the opening and closing member 39c by a special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 42). The special variation winning device 39 converts the state where the special winning opening is closed (blocked state disadvantageous to the player) to the open state (special gaming state advantageous to the player) according to the result of the special figure variable display game, By facilitating the flow of gaming balls into the mouth, a predetermined gaming value (winning balls) is given to the player. In the special winning opening, a count switch 39a (see FIG. 42) is disposed as a detection means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening.

  In the game area 32 at the lower left of the center case 40, two general winning openings 35 are arranged. The winning of the game ball on the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switches (SW) 35a to 35n (see FIG. 42) provided on the general winning opening 35.

  In the game area 32 below the center case 40, a start winning opening unit 820 is provided. The first start winning opening 36 (first start winning area, starting opening 1) which gives the start condition (starting condition) of the special view 1 variation display game when the game ball wins under the start winning opening unit 820. And a third starting winning opening 42 (third starting winning area, starting opening 3) for giving a start condition (starting condition) of the special view 2 variation display game when the gaming ball wins.

  The start winning opening unit 820 is configured such that the game balls entered from the common entrance 823 can be distributed by the prize switching mechanism 825 so that the first starting winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42 can be alternately paid. As the prize switching mechanism 825, a known mechanism (for example, described in JP-A-2015-36026, JP-A-2015-77230) can be used. The prize switching mechanism 825 constitutes area changing means for changing the prize area.

  The prize switching mechanism 825 distributes the gaming balls entered from the common entrance 823 of the starting winning opening unit 820 to the left side (the first starting winning opening 36 side) and the right side (the third starting winning opening 42 side). Let flow down in 820. The game ball is more likely to flow into the common entrance 823 of the start winning hole unit 820 at the time of left hitting when the game ball is allowed to flow down on the left side of the game area 32 than at the time of right hitting.

  The prize switching mechanism 825 has a rotating member that rotates around the rotation axis with respect to the start winning hole unit 820 main body, and a stopper member that stops the rotation of the rotating member. The rotation member has three extensions extending in three directions from the rotation axis. An L-shaped housing unit for accommodating gaming balls to be flowed down to the first start winning opening 36 and an L-shaped accommodation unit for housing gaming balls to be flowed down to the third startup winning opening 42 by the three extension portions It is formed.

  The prize switching mechanism 825 rotates the rotating member alternately to the left and right, and alternately switches the starting winning opening where the gaming ball wins to the first starting winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42. The game ball entering the common entrance 823 of the start winning opening unit 820 alternates to the left (first start winning opening 36 side) and the right (third starting winning opening 42 side) by the prize switching mechanism 825 unless there is an error. Thus, the first starting winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42 will be alternately winning (entering).

  The second start winning opening (the start condition (starting condition) of the special view 2 variation display game is given to the right side game area 32 of the center case 40 based on the winning of the gaming ball below the common view starting gate 34 A normal fluctuation winning device 37 having a second start winning area) is provided. The normal fluctuation winning device 37 includes an open / close member (movable member) 37b that converts the game ball into a state in which the game ball easily flows in by rotating in a direction in which the upper end side falls to the right. When the opening and closing member (movable member) 37b is in the closed state, the gaming ball can not normally win the fluctuation prize device 37. When the gaming ball wins the first start winning opening 36, the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37), or the third starting winning opening 42, the special view variation display game is executed as an auxiliary game. .

  The opening / closing member (movable member) 37b is a so-called electric-chu-type ordinary electric power role, and when the result of the common drawing variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the common electric solenoid 37c (see FIG. 42) The game ball is rotated and opened through the opening, and the gaming ball changes to an open state in which the game ball normally flows into the variable winning device 37 (a winning easy state advantageous to the player).

  The movable member 37b is controlled by the game control apparatus 100 described later. The game control device 100 increases the frequency of occurrence of the easy-to-win state by shortening the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game or making the hit probability of the common drawing fluctuation display game higher than usual, or the normal gaming state The time-saving state (general power support state) is generated as the above-mentioned specific gaming state by lengthening the generation time of the easy-to-win state more than the easy-to-win state generated in. In the definite change state (except for the latent change) as the specific gaming state, the time saving state (general power support state) occurs redundantly.

  Next, the flow of the game in the gaming machine 10, and the details of the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game will be described.

  In the gaming machine 10, a game is played by striking a gaming ball from a ball launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by obstacle nails or windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common drawing start gate 34, the general winning opening 35, the first start The winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, or the special fluctuation winning device 39, or flows into the out port 30b provided at the bottom of the gaming area 32, and discharged from the gaming area 32 Be done. And, when the game ball wins in the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, or the special fluctuation winning device 39, the number according to the type of winning opening that has won The prize balls are discharged to the upper tray 21 through the payout device.

  The common view start gate 34 is provided with a gate switch 34a (see FIG. 42) for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the common view start gate 34. When the gaming ball passes through the common drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a, and the common drawing fluctuation display game is executed based on the judgment result of the hit judgment random number value extracted at this time.

  A state in which a common drawing fluctuation display game can not be started, for example, when a common drawing fluctuation display game has already been played and the common drawing fluctuation display game has not ended, or the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit and it is normal When the variable winning device 37 is converted to the open state, when the gaming ball passes the common drawing start gate 34, the number of common drawing start memories is added (+1) if the number is lower than the upper limit number.

  A hit determination random number value is stored in the hit map start memory to determine hit hit of the hit game variation display game, and when the hit judgment random number value matches the decision value, the hit map change display is performed. The game is hit and a specific result aspect (specific result) is derived.

  The common drawing variation display game is executed by the common drawing indicator 53 provided in the collective display device 50. The common drawing indicator 53 is composed of an LED which indicates a hit in the case of the lighting state as normal identification information (general drawing), and shows a deviation in the case of the light-off state, and this LED blinks to indicate fluctuation of the normal identification information. The display is performed, and the result is displayed by turning on or off the LED after a predetermined fluctuation display time has elapsed.

  When the common drawing random number value extracted at the time of passing the common drawing start gate 34 is a hit value, the normal symbol displayed on the common drawing display 53 is stopped in the hit state and becomes the hit state. At this time, the movable member 37b is converted to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) by driving the common voltage solenoid 37c (see FIG. 42), and the game ball to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is Winning is acceptable.

  The winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the winning of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the winning of the third starting winning opening 42, the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 42), the starting opening 2 switch 37a (See FIG. 42) and the start opening 3 switch 42a (see FIG. 42). The game ball that has won the first start winning opening 36 is detected as the starting winning ball for the special view 1 variation display game, and is stored within the predetermined upper limit number, and the normal variation winning device 37 and the third start winning opening 42 The game ball that has won a prize is detected as a start winning ball for the special view 2 variable display game, and is stored within a predetermined upper limit number.

  When detecting the start winning balls of the special view variation display game, a big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, each variation pattern random number value, etc. are extracted. These random number values are stored in the special figure reservation storage area (a part of the RAM) of the game control apparatus 100 (see FIG. 42) as a special figure start winning memory, each for a predetermined number of times (for example, at a maximum of eight times) . The storage number of the special view start winning memory is displayed on the special view 1 hold display 54 or the special view 2 hold display 55 for notifying the start win number of the collective display device 50 and also on the display screen of the display 41 Is displayed.

  The game control device 100 executes the special view 1 variation display game with the special view 1 display 51 based on the winning on the start winning hole 36 or the first start storage. Further, the game control device 100 executes the special view 2 change display game with the special view 2 display 52 based on the winning of the normal change winning device 37 or the third start winning opening 42 or the second start storage.

  The special figure 1 variation display game (first special figure variation display game) and the special figure 2 variation display game (second special figure variation display game) are identification information (special figure 1 display 51 and special figure 2 display 52) It is carried out by stopping and displaying a predetermined result mode after changing and displaying the special symbol and the special figure). Further, in the display device 41, a decorative special view variation display game in which a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, character patterns, etc.) are variably displayed corresponding to each special view variation display game is executed.

  In the decorative special figure variation display game in the display device 41, the decorative special symbol (identification information) composed of the above-mentioned numerals etc. is left (first special symbol), right (second special symbol), middle (third special symbol) The variable display (scroll display) is started in the order of d), and symbols which are changed after a predetermined time are sequentially stopped to display the result of the special figure change display game. In addition, in the display device 41, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest. Furthermore, in the decoration special figure variation display game, as the other decoration special symbols (identification information), the lower left light emitting portion 85 and the lower right light emission provided on the lamp display device 80 by repeating (flickering) lighting display and extinguishing display. The part 86 can be changed as a fourth special symbol (fourth symbol) to notify that the special figure variation display game is being executed.

  The variable display of the fourth special symbol is stopped after a predetermined time from the start, in the case of "off" in the case of a break, and in "lighting" in the case of a big hit. The variable display of the fourth special symbol is displayed by the light emitting units 85 and 86 of the lamp display device 80, but may be displayed by the other display devices 41 and sub display devices.

  Here, the lamp display device 80 will be described. The light emitting unit 81 at the upper left and the light emitting unit 82 at the upper right notify information on the suspension of the special view 2, and the light emitting unit 83 at the middle left and the light emitting unit 84 at the middle right The information on the hold of FIG. 1 is notified. The lower left light emitting unit 85 notifies as the fourth symbol of the special view 1 variation display game, and the lower right light emitting unit 86 notifies as the fourth symbol of the special view 2 variation display game. In addition, it may be notified that the variation display game is being executed (during variation) or being stopped without distinguishing the fourth symbol of the special figure 1 and the fourth symbol of the special figure 2 . For example, when only the light emitting unit 85 is turned on, the change stop may be notified, and the turning on of the light emitting unit 85 and the light emitting unit 86 may be notified of the change in progress.

  When the winning of the game ball to the first starting winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42 or the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is made at a predetermined timing (when the big hit random number value at the time of winning detection is the big hit value) A special result mode (special result mode) is derived from the display symbol as a result of the special view variation display game, and becomes a big hit state (special game state). Corresponding to this, the display mode of the display device 41 is a special result mode (for example, a state in which numbers such as "7, 7, 7" are aligned).

  At this time, the special variation winning device 39 is converted from the closed state to the open state for a predetermined time (for example, 30 seconds) by energization to the special winning opening solenoid (39b) (see FIG. 42). That is, the special winning opening provided in the special variation winning device 39 opens widely until a predetermined time or a predetermined number of gaming balls win, and during this time, a bonus is given that the player can acquire many gaming balls. Ru.

  At this time, in the special variation winning device 39, the special winning opening is converted from the closed state to the open state only for a predetermined short time by energization to the special winning opening solenoid 39b (see FIG. 42).

  In addition, although the special figure 1 display 51 and the special figure 2 display 52 may be comprised as a separate display, and may be comprised as the same display, each special figure fluctuation display game is not performed simultaneously Is set as

  With regard to the decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41, the special figure 1 variation display game and the special figure 2 variation display game may be executed on different display devices or separate display areas, or the same indication It may be executed in the device or the display area. In this case, the special-figure variation display game corresponding to the special-figure 1 variation display game and the special-figure 2 variation display game is prevented from being simultaneously executed. In addition, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game are executed in the order of occurrence of winnings (that is, start memory) (a winning order settlement), the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and / or When start memory of the special view 2 variable display game is generated and the special view change display game can be executed, the variable display game based on the oldest start memory is executed.

  In the following description, when the special view 1 change display game and the special view 2 change display game are not distinguished from each other, they are simply referred to as a special view change display game.

  In addition, although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36a in the first start winning combination port 36, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, the start opening 3 in the third start winning combination port 42 The switch 42a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the count switch (39a) are provided with a coil for detecting magnetism, and contactless to detect a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. Type magnetic proximity sensors (hereinafter referred to as proximity switches) are used. In addition, a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or a front frame opening detection switch 64 (main frame opening detection switch) provided on the front frame (game frame) 12 etc. It is possible to use a microswitch having various contacts.

[Main configuration of gaming machine]
FIG. 3 is a perspective view of the game board (game board unit) 30 and the control device unit 280, which are the main components of the game machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The control device unit 280 disposed on the back of the game board (game board unit) 30 is a collection of movable prizes and is accommodated in a control base 270 which is a housing for accommodating prizes.

  The control base 270 has a predetermined depth for receiving the controller unit 280, and the upper plate 270a, the left plate 270b, the right plate 270c, and the lower plate 270d are integrally formed with the back plate 270e at the bottom. An opening 270 f for making the display screen visible is formed in the back plate 270 e, and the display device 41 is attached to the back of the opening 270 f.

  The controller unit 280 includes a ball discharging unit 450, a first movable service unit 500, a second movable service unit 550, a third movable service unit 600, a fourth movable service unit 650, and a fifth movable service unit 700. (See FIG. 4), and has an opening 280a similar to the opening 270f so that the image of the display device 41 can be viewed from the front.

  The periphery of the opening 280a is an opening provided in the game board 30, and can be viewed from the front through the fitting portion of the center case 40. Therefore, various decorations can be made to each movable role unit as an appealing portion to the player. Is applied. In the decoration, fine patterns of the same type or similar are formed in multiple layers in order to give a three-dimensional effect, and together with the decoration light from the back surface etc., give the player a colorful impression.

  The decoration comprises a fixed decoration and an operable decoration, and the movable decoration is capable of rotating, swinging and sliding. The upper decoration rotating body group 580 capable of rotating or swinging operation and the right decoration rotating body group 630 are provided as the operable decoration portion, and the upper decoration rotating body group 580 rotates the right decoration by the motor 557 (see FIG. 9). The body group 630 is driven by a motor 607. A central effect member 525 capable of rotating or swinging is provided below the opening 280a, and a slide decoration member 540 capable of sliding operation is provided on the left and right of the central effect member 525.

  The game board 30 is a front case of a game board main body (veneer board) 30a which is a base member of the game board 30, a center case (game effect structure) 40, a special fluctuation winning apparatus unit 800, a normal fluctuation winning apparatus unit 810, and a start. The winning opening unit 820, the general winning opening unit 840, and the ball guiding unit 850 are fitted together. These units and members are fitted to the game board 30 and electrically connected to the game control apparatus 100 etc., and transmit detection signals of switches included in each unit and drive power to solenoids included in each unit. It becomes a road.

  The special variation winning device unit 800 (special variation winning device 39) is a device in which a special winning opening is opened in the special gaming state.

  The normal fluctuation winning device unit 810 (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is a device internally provided with a second start winning opening.

  The start winning opening unit 820 is a unit including the start winning openings (first start winning opening 36, third starting winning opening 42) of the special view 1 and the special view 2, and the general winning opening unit 840 is a plurality of general winning openings. It is a unit provided with the mouth 35.

  The ball guiding portion 850 is a member for rolling the gaming ball having flowed down the left side of the gaming area 32 in the lateral direction and guiding it to the general winning opening 35 or the like. Below the guiding surface of the ball guiding portion 850, the above-mentioned lamp display 80 is provided.

Controller Unit
FIG. 4 is an exploded perspective view of the controller unit 280. As shown in FIG. The controller unit 280 includes a ball discharging unit 450, a first movable service unit 500, a second movable service unit 550, a third movable service unit 600, a fourth movable service unit 650, and a fifth movable service unit 700. including.

  Among them, the first movable service unit 500, the second movable service unit 550, the third movable service unit 600, and the fifth movable service unit 700 are attached to the fourth movable service unit 650, and the ball discharging unit 450 is fastened to the control base 270.

  The ball discharging unit 450 is a unit for discharging the game ball having a winning to the general winning opening 35, the first starting winning opening 36, the third starting winning opening 42, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 from the gaming board 30. In the upper right portion of the ball discharging unit 450, a general winning channel lower discharge portion 451 is formed in which the gaming balls that have won the prize flow down at the general winning opening 35 at the upper right of the gaming board, and the discharging channel shown in FIG. A lower port 643 of 640 is connected.

  The first movable character unit 500 has a light emitting effect and a light emitting portion 522a and 522b by the central effect member 525 imitating the shape of a flower, the slide decoration member 540 with which the left slide decoration member 540a and the right slide decoration member 540b open and close. A motion effect is executed.

  The second movable part unit 550 forms a gate-shaped unit together with the third movable part unit 600, but can be separated from the third movable part unit 600. The second movable role unit 550 includes a second movable role (upper decoration rotating body group) 580 in which a plurality of rotating bodies (rotating members) having a cherry blossom pattern are integrally rotated. The second movable part product unit 550 is provided with fixed decorative portions 571a, 567a, 552a consisting of three layers on the left side of the opening 280a, and fixed decorative portions 571b, 567b, 552b consisting of three layers at the upper side of the opening 280a. Equipped with

  The third movable role unit 600 includes a third movable role (right decoration rotating body group) 630 in which a plurality of rotating bodies (rotating members) having a cherry blossom pattern are integrally rotated. In addition, the third movable character product unit 600 is provided with the fixed decorative portion 621, 618, 602 consisting of three layers on the right side of the opening 280a, the second decorative movable portion because the plurality of cherry blossoms appear to overlap Together with the fixed decoration of the character unit 550, it forms a deep cherry arch. In addition, the third movable feature unit 600 is provided with a passage opening 622 for passing the winning balls of the general winning opening 35 provided on the upper right of the game board 30, and the prize opening via the discharge flow path 640 (see FIG. 12). Are guided to the ball discharging unit 450. Also, the third movable feature unit 600 is visible from the front through the game board 30, and includes a housing portion 624 decorated on the front.

  The fourth movable character unit 650 moves (lifts) the fourth movable character (raising and lowering member) 665 that moves (lifts) to the front center of the display 41 from the outer peripheral edge of the display 41 at the initial position (Figure 18) and a light guide plate 680 (see FIG. 18). The lifting member 665 is driven by the motor 652. The light guide plate 680 is fixed to the fourth movable object front base 671. The fourth movable role front base 671 is composed of an upper side 671a, a left side 671b, a right side 671c, and a lower side 671d which also serves as a guide function of the drive mechanism of the elevation member 665. It will be.

  The position of the movable part is assumed to be the first position as the initial position and the second position as the operation position.

  The fifth movable role unit 700 moves (moves up and down) from the outer peripheral edge portion of the display device 41 at the initial position to the front center of the display device 41 at the operating position. Prepare. The fifth movable part 720 reciprocates between the initial position and the operating position as the first arm 710 is rotated by the motor 706. The engaging portion 724 is a member for supporting the fifth movable part 720, and the guide 726 is also an indication member of the fifth movable part 720.

  FIG. 5 is a front view of the controller unit 280 in which each movable part is in operation or in an operation position.

  When the central effect member 525 included in the first movable role unit 500 is in operation, the central effect member 525 rotates, and a light emitting operation is also possible separately from the rotating operation. The driven gear 535 is engaged with a main moving gear 538 axially mounted on the output shaft of the motor 537 (see FIG. 6), and the pin engagement portion 535a (see FIG. 6) engages with the crank pin 542a of the left slide groove 541a. United. The driven gear 536 is also engaged with the motor 537, and the pin engagement portion 536a (see FIG. 6) is engaged with the crank pin 542b of the right slide groove 541b. Then, as the motor 537 rotates, the slide decoration member 540 slides to the initial position in the closed state and the operation position in the open state.

  The left slide decoration member 540a and the right slide decoration member 540b are decorated on the upper half of the front surface, respectively, and have horizontally extending wedge-shaped openings 543a and 543b at the center of each part to be decorated Is formed. The openings 543a and 543b are provided so that the light of the light emitting portions (LEDs) 522a and 522b can be directly viewed.

  The side where the left slide decorative member 540a and the right slide decorative member 540b are in contact with each other and a portion to be decorated is a circular arc so that the central effect member 525 can be directly viewed even when the slide decorative member 540 is closed. Mold notches 544a, 544b are formed. The circle formed by the notches 544a and the notches 544b is smaller than the outer periphery of the central effect member 525, and the petal part of the central effect member 525 is just hidden so that the central portion of the central effect member 525 can be directly viewed. ing.

  Three-layer fixed decorative portion 571a, 567a, 552a provided in the second movable role unit 550, fixed decorative portions 571b, 567b, 552b, and further, a three-layer fixed decorative portion provided in the third movable role unit 600 571a, 567a, 552a together form a cherry arch. Since the arches can see cherry blossoms as they fold over, they provide a glamorous presentation space with depth and emotion.

  Then, a second movable character (upper decorative rotator group) 580 is disposed slightly outside the fixed decorative portions 571a, 567a, 552a and the fixed decorative portions 571b, 567b, 552b of the second movable character unit 550, Since the third movable character (right decorative rotating body group) 630 is disposed slightly outside the fixed decorative portions 571a, 567a, 552a of the third movable character unit 600, and the respective decorative rotating bodies rotate in unison, You can move to the cherry arch. Further, as described later, the upper decoration rotating body group 580 and the right decoration rotating body group 630 integrally rotate clockwise and thereby notify the player that it is time to hit the right.

  Among the fourth movable part (lifting and lowering member) 665 (see FIG. 17) and the light guide plate 680 (refer to FIG. 17) included in the fourth movable role unit 650, the display device Move to the front of 41 (drop). A decorative panel (not shown) having high designability is provided on the front surface of the raising and lowering member 665. The light emission mode of the light guide plate 680 will be described later.

  When the fifth movable character object 720 imitating a crescent moon included in the fifth movable character object unit 700 is in the operation position, it moves (rises) to the front of the display device 41, and the decorative portion 730 (see FIG. 32) Most of the will be visible.

[First movable role unit]
FIG. 6 is an exploded perspective view of the first movable service unit 500. As shown in FIG. The first movable service unit 500 is located below the controller unit 280, and is a horizontally long, substantially rectangular unit.

  The first movable role unit 500 includes a first movable portion back base 501 and a first movable portion front base 530 as skeletons.

  The first movable character back base 501 is formed with a housing portion 501a having a crescent-shaped arc in order to store the fifth movable raw object 720 on the back surface, and the right end of the first movable character back base 501 is A passage hole 501 b of a motor 706 (see FIG. 32) for driving the fifth movable part 720 is formed.

  An illumination substrate base 510 is attached to the front of the first movable object back base 501, and an illumination substrate 520 is attached to the front of the illumination substrate base 510. A motor 512, which is a drive source of the central effect member 525, is attached to the back surface of the illumination substrate base 510. A worm gear 513 is axially attached to an output shaft of the motor 512, and a driven gear 514 is engaged with the worm gear 513. The rotating shaft 515 of the driven gear 514 passes through the passage hole 510a of the illumination substrate base 510 and the illumination substrate 520 It passes through the hole 521 a and is connected to the central effect member 525.

  The illumination board 520 includes a rectangular housing portion 521 for housing the central effect member 525, a left arm portion 523a and a right arm portion 523b formed on both sides of the housing portion 521, and a plurality of light emitting portions 522a are provided in the left arm portion 523a. The right arm 523b is provided with a plurality of light emitting portions 522b. Then, the cover 526 covering the light emitting portion 522 is attached to the lighting substrate base 510 from the front side with the lighting substrate 520 interposed therebetween.

  An opening 527 provided at the center of the cover 526 so as not to cover the central effect member 525 is formed at the center, and on both sides of the opening 527, passage holes 526a, 526b are formed at positions corresponding to the light emitting portions 522a, 522b. Be done.

  The first movable part front base 530 is a member that covers the first movable part back base 501 from the front, includes a bulging portion 530a that accommodates the illumination substrate 520, and a cover is provided at the central portion of the bulging portion 530a. An opening 531 having the same shape as 526 is formed.

  Below the bulging portion 530a, a gear receiving portion 530b for receiving the left driven gear 535 and the right driven gear 536 for driving the slide decoration member 540 is formed. The gear housing portion 530b is provided at the center with a passage hole 536b through which the main driving gear 538 passes, and the motor 537 serving as a drive source of the slide decoration member 540 is attached to the back surface of the gear housing portion 530b.

  A shaft 534a for supporting the left driven gear 535 is formed on the left side of the passage hole 536b, and a shaft 534b for supporting the right driven gear 536 is formed on the right side of the passage hole 536b. The left driven gear 535 and the right driven gear 536 are engaged with the main driving gear 538, respectively.

  A pin engaging portion 535a to be engaged with the crank pin 542a is formed at a point on the outer peripheral portion opposite to the surface on which the gear of the left driven gear 535 is formed. The same applies to the right driven gear 536. The crank pin 542a is movable up and down in the slide groove 541a of the left slide decoration member 540a, and the crank pin 542b provided in the right slide decoration member 540b is similar. The slide decoration member 540 slides (opens and closes) to the left and right by the rotation of the left and right driven gears 535 and 536.

  The left slide decorative member 540a is decorated on the upper half thereof, and a bowl-shaped opening 543a is formed in the center of the decorative portion. In addition, an arc-shaped notch 544a is formed on the side in contact with the right slide decoration member 540b. The right slide decorative member 540b formed to be symmetrical to the left and right has a similar shape.

  FIG. 7 is a front view of the first movable part unit 500 in which the first movable part 500a is in the initial position. FIG. 8 is a front view in the same operating position.

  As shown in FIG. 7, when the first movable part 500a is at the initial position, five left light emitting parts 522a and five right light emitting parts 522b are exposed through the openings 543a and 543b, respectively. Further, when the left and right slide decoration members 540a and 540b abut, the arc-shaped notches 544a and 544b form a single annular ring, and the central portion of the central effect member 525 is exposed through the annular ring.

  The central rendering member 525 often does not perform rendering operations such as rotation or light emission when the slide decoration member 540 is closed (in the initial position), and the slide decoration member 540 is open (in the operating position) The rendering operation is often performed when the slide decoration member 540 is continuously opened and closed.

  When the first movable part 500 a is in the operating position, as shown in FIG. 8, the left and right slide decoration members 540 a and 540 b are separated, so that the central effect member 525 is entirely exposed. Therefore, the operation mode of the central effect member 525 can be clearly viewed. On the other hand, the left light emitting portion 522a and the right light emitting portion 522b are partially covered by the slide decoration member 540, but the plurality of light emitting portions 522 can be viewed directly from the front through the openings 543a and 543b.

  The slide groove 541 (left slide groove 541a, right slide groove 541b) is formed longitudinally in the longitudinal direction so as to correspond to the vertical amount of the crankpin 542 (left crank pin 542a, right crank pin 542b). When the gears 535, 536 make one rotation, the slide decoration member 540 makes one reciprocation of the initial position and the operating position.

[2nd movable role unit]
FIG. 9 is an exploded perspective view of the second movable service unit 550. 10 is a rear view of the second movable service unit 550, and FIG. 11 is a plan view of the second movable service unit 550.

  The second movable character unit 550 and the third movable character unit 600 to be described later are units provided with a fixed decorative portion and a rotatable decorative portion to which a decoration imitating a cherry blossom is applied. The rotatable decorative portion is a decorative rotating body, and the decorative rotating bodies are gathered to form an upper decorative rotating body group 580 and a right decorative rotating body group 630 (see FIG. 12).

  The second movable role unit 550 has three base members of a second movable portion back base 551, a second movable portion middle base 565, and a second movable portion front base 570, and each of the base members is Each of them is a translucent member having two arms in an L-shape.

  The second movable product back base 551 includes a motor 557 on the back and a support of the gear group 560 on the front. On the right side of the longitudinal arm having a longitudinal length, a fixed decorative portion 552a of the first layer, which is the decorative portion at the deepest position, is formed, and on the lower side of the lateral arm having a longitudinal length Similarly, the fixed decoration portion 552b is formed.

  The motor 557 is a drive source for driving the gear group 560, and the main movement gear 558 is axially attached to the output shaft of the motor 557. The second movable part rear face base 551 is formed with a gear passage hole 556 for passing the main movement gear 558, and the main movement gear 558 is disposed in the front face of the second movable part rear face base 551 in the vicinity of the gear passage hole 556 Work gear 561 and the intermediate gear 562.

  A plurality of bosses provided on the front surface of the second movable character back base 551 is formed with a spacerless boss and a spacer boss, and the spacer boss 555 is used to attach the second movable arm intermediate base 565. Is the boss of The spacerless boss 554 is a boss that pivotally supports the intermediate gear 562. On the other hand, a plurality of support holes 553 provided in the second movable combination product rear surface base 551 are holes through which bosses of a shaft portion of the work gear 561 are inserted to support the work gear 561.

  The gear group 560 includes a work gear 561, an intermediate gear 562, and a sensor gear 563. The work gear 561 is a gear through which the shaft portion of the decorative rotating body is inserted and which rotates the decorative rotating body. The intermediate gear 562 is a gear provided so that the rotation directions of the work gear 561 are aligned, and the sensor gear 563 is a gear provided such that the rotation angle of the gear group 560 can be detected by the sensor 564. The sensor gear 563 includes a cylindrical light shielding portion 563 a partially provided with a notch, and is pivotally supported by a boss 554 a for the sensor gear.

  As shown in FIG. 10, since the intermediate gear 562 is disposed between the work gears 561, the work gears 561 integrally rotate in the same direction. Therefore, the upper decorative rotor group 580 to which the turning power is transmitted by the work gear 561 rotates in the same direction at the same time.

  Here, the sizes of all the work gears 561 and the intermediate gear 562 may be equalized so that one rotation of all the work gears 561 is aligned, or each work is such that the amount of rotation of each work gear 561 is different. The diameters of the gears 561 and the respective intermediate gears 562 may be different. For example, it may be set to rotate more slowly as the diameter of the decorative portion is larger among the decorative rotating bodies.

  Further, the work gear 561 is provided with a hole 561a so that the pin of the jig can be inserted. Since positioning at the time of attaching a gear using a jig can be performed, working efficiency can be improved. In FIG. 10, only the holes 561a of the work gear 561 meshed with the sensor gear 563 are denoted by reference numerals, but the holes 561a are provided in all the work gears 561. Further, the hole is not limited to the work gear 561 so that the pins of the jig can be inserted, and may be provided in all kinds of spur gears used in the gaming machine 10.

  The second movable product intermediate base 565 attached to the second movable product back surface base 551 via the boss 555 having a spacer accommodates the gear group 560 on the back surface, and includes the LED substrate 568 on the front surface. The LED substrate 568 is provided with an LED on the path of the wiring 566, and can illuminate the upper decorative rotator group 580 from the rear by the LED. The wiring 566 is formed by silk printing of a conductive member, and based on the printing of the wiring 566, it can be seen at a glance at grouping control of lighting of the LEDs on the same substrate.

  A fixed decorative portion 567a as a second layer is formed on the right side surface of the vertical arm of the second movable role intermediate base 565, and a fixed decorative portion 567b is similarly formed on the lower side surface of the horizontal arm.

  A second movable part front base 570 is attached to the front of the second movable part intermediate base 565. A fixed decorative portion 571a as a third layer is formed on the right side surface of the vertical arm of the second movable role front base 570, and a fixed decorative portion 571b is similarly formed on the lower side surface of the horizontal arm.

  Furthermore, on the front surface of the second movable part front surface base 570, spacer portions of three different heights for inserting the support shaft of the decorative rotating body are formed. The spacer portions can be divided into a first spacer portion 572, a second spacer portion 573, and a third spacer portion 574 in ascending order of height.

  Each decorative rotator of the upper decorative rotator group 580 is attached to the second movable role unit 550 in three layers according to the height of the rotational surface. As shown in FIG. 11, the uppermost layer (third layer) of the upper decoration rotating body group 580 is constituted by the decoration rotating bodies 581a, 581b, 581c, 581d, and 581e. The middle layer (the second layer) of the upper decoration rotating body group 580 is constituted by the decoration rotating bodies 583a, 583b, 583c, 583d, 583e, 583f. The lowermost layer (first layer) of the upper decoration rotator group 580 is constituted by the decoration rotators 585a, 585b, 585c, 585d, 585e, 585f, 585g.

  Among the top layer (third layer) decorative rotating members, the small-diameter decorative rotating member 581d is inserted into the above-mentioned second spacer portion 573, and the other decorative rotating members 581a, 581b, 581c, and 581e are third ones. The spacer portion 574 is inserted. In addition, the decorative rotating bodies 583 a, 583 b, 583 c, 583 d, 583 e, and 583 f of the intermediate layer (second layer) are inserted into the first spacer portion 572. The lower layer (first layer) decorative rotating members 585 a, 585 b, 585 c, 585 d, 585 e, 585 f, and 585 g are inserted into the insertion holes 575 formed in the second movable part front base 570.

  These decorative rotating bodies are arranged to be dispersed in the front-rear direction (from the back to the front) or in the vertical direction, so that the decorative rotating bodies can be smoothly rotated without colliding with each other.

[Third movable character unit]
FIG. 12 is an exploded perspective view of the third movable service unit 600. FIG. 13 is a plan view of the third movable service unit 600. As shown in FIG.

  The third movable role unit 600 has three base members of a third movable portion back base 601, a third movable portion middle base 615, and a third movable portion front base 620, and each of the base members is Each of them is a substantially triangular translucent member having a length in the longitudinal direction.

  The third movable product back base 601 is provided with a motor 607 on the back and a support for the gear group 610 on the front. Further, on the back surface of the third movable character article back surface base 601, a discharge flow channel 640, which is a flow channel for discharging the game balls winning in the general winning hole 35, is attached. In the upper right portion, a passage hole 601 b through which the upper port 641 of the discharge flow passage 640 is formed is formed. In addition, on the left side surface of the third movable role product back surface base 601, a first layer fixed decorative portion 602 which is a decorative portion at the deepest position is formed.

  The motor 607 is a drive source for driving the gear group 610, and the main movement gear 608 is pivotally mounted on the output shaft thereof. A gear passing hole 601 a for passing the main movement gear 608 is formed in the third movable part back surface base 601, and the main movement gear 608 is arranged in the front surface of the third movable part back surface base 601 near the gear passage hole 601 a Work gear 611 and the intermediate gear 612.

  The plurality of bosses provided on the front surface of the third movable character back base 601 are formed with a spacerless boss and a spacer boss, and the spacer bosses 605 are for attaching the third movable character intermediate base 615 Is the boss of The spacerless bosses 604 are bosses that pivotally support the intermediate gear 612. On the other hand, a plurality of support holes 603 provided in the third movable part product back surface base 601 are holes through which bosses of a shaft portion of the work gear 611 are inserted to support the work gear 611.

  The sensor gear 613 is a gear provided so that the sensor 609 can detect the rotation angle of the gear group 610. The sensor gear 613 is provided with a cylindrical light shielding portion in which a notch is partially provided, and is pivotally supported by a boss 604 a for the sensor gear.

  The third movable product intermediate base 615 attached to the third movable product rear surface base 601 via the boss 605 having a spacer houses the gear group 610 on the rear surface, and includes the LED substrate 619 on the front surface. In the LED substrate 619, an LED is provided on the path of the wiring 617, and the LED can illuminate the right decoration rotator group 630 from behind. The wiring 617 is formed by silk printing of a conductive member, and based on the printing of the wiring 617, grouping of lighting control of the LEDs on the same substrate can be recognized at a glance.

  A fixed decorative portion 618 serving as a second layer is formed on the left side surface of the third movable service intermediate base 615, and an upper opening 641 of the discharge flow path 640 is formed at the upper right portion of the third movable auxiliary intermediate base 615. A passage hole 616 is formed to allow passage.

  A third movable part front base 620 is attached to the front of the third movable part intermediate base 615. On the left side of the third movable product front base 620, a fixed decorative portion 621 to be a third layer is formed. A storage portion 624 for storing the upper port 641 of the discharge flow path 640 is formed in the upper right portion of the third movable product front base 620, and the front surface of the storage portion 624 is decorated. A passage opening 622 is provided on the left side of the housing portion 624 for passing the game ball that has won the general winning opening 35, and the game ball is allowed to pass through the discharge flow path 640.

  The discharge flow path 640 is connected to the general winning flow path lower discharge portion 451 (see FIG. 4) of the ball discharge unit 450 at the lower port 643.

  Spacers of two different heights are formed on the front surface of the third movable product front base 620, through which the support shaft of the decorative rotor is inserted. The spacer portion is divided into a first spacer portion 625 and a second spacer portion 626 in ascending order of height.

  Each decoration rotation body of the right decoration rotation body group 630 is divided into three layers according to the height of the rotation surface and attached to the third movable feature unit 600. As shown in FIG. 13, the top layer (third layer) of the right decoration rotating body group 630 is configured of decoration rotating bodies 631 a, 631 b, and 631 c. The middle layer (the second layer) of the right decoration rotary body group 630 is configured by the decorative rotary bodies 633 a, 633 b, and 633 c. The lowermost layer (first layer) of the right decoration rotating body group 630 is constituted by decoration rotating bodies 635a and 635b.

  The top layer (third layer) decorative rotating bodies 631 a, 631 b, 631 c are inserted into the second spacer portion 626. In addition, the decoration rotary bodies 633 a, 633 b, 633 c of the middle layer (second layer) are inserted into the first spacer portion 625. The lowermost layer (first layer) decorative rotators 635 a and 635 b are inserted through insertion holes 627 formed in the third movable part front base 620.

  As described above, the second movable combination product unit 550 and the third movable combination product unit 600 are provided with the three-layer fixed decoration portion and the three-layer decoration rotating body, thereby forming a total of six layers of cherry blossom arches. Can provide an elegant and deep space.

〔Time chart〕
Next, operation timings of the second movable role product (upper decorative rotating body group) 550a and the third movable role object (right decorative rotating body group) 600a will be described. FIG. 14 is a time chart explaining an example of operation timings of the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a. FIG. 15 is a time chart for explaining another example of operation timings of the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a.

  In both FIG. 14 and FIG. 15, the fanfare effect starts at time T1, and the fanfare effect ends at time T2, and the big hit game is started. At time T3, an end effect is started as the big hit game ends, and at time T4, an end effect is ended and a power support (general power support state, specific game state) is started. Also, CW of the motor means Clock Wise (clockwise) and CCW means Counter Clock Wise (counterclockwise). When the motor 557 of the second movable part is switched to CW, the second movable part 550a is simultaneously rotated clockwise. In addition, when the motor 607 of the third movable product is switched to CW, the third movable product 600a is simultaneously rotated clockwise.

  The time chart shown in FIG. 14 is an example of operation setting of the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a. Here, from the fan fare start (T1) to the big hit game end (T3), the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a turn clockwise to stop moving once with the ending start (T3), and then turn off It rotates clockwise again with the start of support (T4).

  With such an operation setting, the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a can be integrally turned clockwise in all the time of right-handed driving.

  However, the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a may have many pivoting parts, and if the pivoting time is long, the heat generation will be correspondingly large, so that the possibility of failure may occur. . Therefore, a setting for appropriately stopping the movement of the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a is also provided.

  The time chart shown in FIG. 15 is another example of the operation setting of the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a. Here, the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a rotate clockwise from the start of fanfare (T1) to the end of fanfare (T2). After that, the second movable role 550a repeatedly rotates and stops once every unit of time indicated by the double-headed arrow W1 at the border of the big hit game start (T2), and the third movable role 600a moves the double-headed arrow W2 Repeat turning and stopping every 2 units of time shown in. W1 is, for example, a period during which each decorative rotating body rotates one rotation, and W2 is, for example, a period during which each decorative rotating body rotates twice. It should be noted that the operation amount of each movable combination may not be set by a period, and may be set to be switched OFF when the stepping motor is CW or CCW for a predetermined number of steps (number of pulses).

  Here, by shortening the stop period of the third movable combination 600a disposed on the right side of the game area 32, the game area 32 that the player wants to aim for is the second of the winning opening and the normal fluctuation winning device 37. It can be emphasized that the starting winning opening is the right playing area 32.

  FIG. 16 is a time chart for explaining an example of operation timings of the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a after power-on. The ending effect ends at time T3, and the power support starts at time T4. At time T5, a predetermined effect is started. The predetermined effect is, for example, an SP reach, or an effect of informing the degree of expectation of a variable display game such as continuous notice effect including pseudo ream. In addition, the predetermined effect may be, for example, an effect relating to the jackpot probability such as the probability of becoming a jackpot fluctuating, or an effect based on an external factor due to the use of game points or interlocking with other game machines. The predetermined effect may not be displayed on the display device 41.

  During the big hit game, the second movable combination 550a and the third movable combination 600a are respectively rotated, and the second movable combination 550a and the third movable combination are from time T3 when the big hit game ends to time T4 when the ending is ended. The object 600a temporarily stops. Thereafter, at time T4, power support (specific gaming state) is started, and the second movable role 550a and the third movable role 600a rotate again, but a period from time T4 to time T5 when the predetermined effect is started In the period W3 which is a period longer than W1 and W2, the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a are repeatedly stopped. After that, when the predetermined effect is executed at time T5, the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a are rotated before reaching a predetermined amount of rotation (for example, a rotation period of W1 which is one unit). Stop moving.

  The power support state (general power support state, specific game state) is longer than the total time in the game than the jackpot gaming state, so the service life of each movable role can be extended by prolonging the stop period in the power support. can do. Also, when a predetermined effect is executed, by stopping each movable role before reaching a predetermined amount of rotation, the player's awareness from the second movable object 550a and the third movable object 600a to a predetermined effect It can be turned.

  When the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a move as part of the predetermined effect, the movable parts 550a and 600a are fixed by stopping both the movable parts 550a and 600a from the start of the fluctuation. It becomes possible to operate from the effect. Further, by stopping both movable role objects 550a and 600a from the start of the change, both movable role objects 550a and 600a can also be provided with a role of advance notice effect, and more attention of the player to the notice effect can be made it can. That is, the player can be made to recognize a special feeling by the fact that the movable role which has been moved regularly until now does not move.

  In the case where both the movable role objects 550a and 600a are moved as a part of the predetermined effect, for example, when the sensor gear 563 or the sensor gear 613 is not at a rotational position where the initial position can be detected by the sensors 564 and 609 due to a trouble. In this case, both the movable role objects 550a and 600a may be kept stopped without being moved according to the predetermined effect of this time.

[Right-handed instruction]
FIG. 17 is a front view of the game board 30 for explaining the operation of the rightward driving period, the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a. Here, the decorative rotary members of the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a are represented by semitransparent circles, and the rotational direction of each decorative rotary member and the direction in which the decorative light propagates in a wave shape to emit light It is indicated by a thick arrow. The display on the display device 41 is indicated by a solid line, but each component of the game board 30 is indicated by a broken line.

  In the central display area 260 of the display device 41, all three special symbols are in the process of being changed, and in the lower display area 265, four start memories are displayed. In the upper left display area 262, “77 more times” and the remaining number of fluctuations in the power support period are displayed, and in the upper right display area 263, “right-hand →” and right-handed timing are displayed. ing.

  In the power support period, since the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a are simultaneously turned clockwise, it is possible to make the player directly understand that it is the right strike timing. Furthermore, the LEDs included in the second movable character 550a and the third movable character 600a emit light so as to flow in a wave form from left to right in a circular arc, thereby giving the player a refreshing feeling at the time of right-handed Can. The effect of emitting light so as to flow from left to right at the time of right strike may be performed by the LED provided on the game board 30 and the decoration devices 18a and 18b.

  In addition, by synergy with the display of "right-handing →" in the upper right display area 263, a large-scale right-handed instruction using half or more of the area of the game board 30 can be expressed, and the right-handed instruction can be raised it can. Further, the lamp display 80 may be provided with a new LED that lights up or blinks in the big hit gaming state or in the power support state, that is, at the time of right hitting, to notify right hitting by the light emission mode of the LED.

  The second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a may be rotated clockwise slightly before the timing of the right strike, whereby the player does not miss the right strike timing and the left You can change from hitting to right hitting. As described above, the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a can operate at different timings.

[Fourth movable character unit]
FIG. 18 is an exploded perspective view of the fourth movable service unit 650. As shown in FIG. The fourth movable role unit 650 includes an elevating unit 660 which raises and lowers the elevating member 665 and a light guide plate unit 670 to which the light guide plate 680 is fixed. Among them, the elevating member 665 forms a fourth movable object 650a.

  The fourth movable role unit 650 includes a fourth movable base back base 651 and a fourth movable front base 671 as a framework.

  The fourth movable product back base 651 is a gate-shaped base, and includes an upper side 651a, a left side 651b, and a right side 651c. A motor 652 for driving the fourth movable combination 650a is provided on the upper right of the fourth movable combination back surface base 651, which is a base of the upper side 651a and the right side 651c. The upper side 651 a is provided with a plurality of gears 653 and 654 for transmitting the power of the motor 652 to the link member 656.

  The link member 656 includes two arms 657 of equal length, and pivots the arm 657 to raise and lower the support member 661. The support member 661 includes five finger portions 662 a to 662 e, and the finger portions 662 a to 662 e are accommodated in an accommodation portion 666 included in the elevating member 665. Furthermore, the pair of engaging portions 661b and 661c of the support member 661 are respectively engaged with the pins 673a and 673b provided on the fourth movable part front base, and the support member 661 is supported by the fourth movable part front base. It is supported from the front side.

  The raising and lowering member 665 is supported from the back side by the support member 661, and a design portion (not shown) with a decoration is provided on the front side. Up to this point, the lifting and lowering unit 660 included in the fourth movable role unit 650 has been described.

  Next, the light guide plate unit 670 provided in the fourth movable part product unit 650 will be described. The light guide plate unit 670 mainly includes the fourth movable object front base 671 and the light guide plate 680.

  The fourth movable role front base 671 is a substantially rectangular base including an upper side 671a, a left side 671b, a right side 671c, and a lower side 671d, and includes an opening 671e so that the image of the display device 41 can be viewed. The upper side portion 671a is formed with a pair of arc-shaped slide grooves 672 for supporting the support member 661 from the front and being slidable by the support member 661. A pin 673a is formed in the left slide groove 672a, and a right slide groove 672b is formed. The pin 673b is movably engaged.

  The light guide plate 680 is attached to the inside of the fourth movable part front base 671 so as to cover the opening 671e of the fourth movable part front base 671 via the translucent support members 674a and 674b. The LED substrate 672 is sandwiched between the support member 674 b and the light guide plate 680. The LED substrate 672 is a substrate provided with a plurality of LEDs 675 (see FIG. 24) that illuminate the light guide plate 680 from the side end. Further, LED substrates (not shown) are also provided on the upper side 671a and the lower side 671d, and the end incidence from the vertical direction is also possible.

  Since the fourth movable part front base 671 to which the light guide plate 680 is attached has a certain thickness, the light guide plate unit 670 is provided with a second light guide plate (second light guide plate) 683 (see FIG. 26). be able to.

[Lifting unit]
FIG. 19 is a rear view of the lifting unit 660 in which the lifting unit 660 is in the initial position, and FIG. 20 is a rear view in the operating position. FIG. 21 is a back view of the fourth movable part back base 651 in which the lifting and lowering unit 660 is in the initial position, and FIG. 22 is a back view in the same operating position.

  First, the configuration of each gear will be described. Among the gears constituting the lifting and lowering unit 660, the driven gear 654a is a gear provided on the pivot base of the first arm 675a, and the driven gear 654b is a gear provided on the pivot base of the second arm 675b. is there. Therefore, when the driven gear 654a rotates, the first arm 657a rotates, and when the driven gear 654b rotates, the second arm 657b rotates.

  The driven gear 654 a is engaged with the main driving gear 653 axially mounted on the output shaft of the motor 652. Three driven gears 655 are provided between the driven gear 654a and the driven gear 654b, and the driving force of the motor 652 is transmitted to the driven gear 654b along these gears.

  Next, the two arms 657 of the link member 656 will be described. The first arm 675a includes an arc-shaped slide groove 658a, and the second arm 675b similarly includes a slide groove 658b. The pin 659a is engaged with the slide groove 658a and the pin 659b is engaged with the slide groove 658b, and the pins 659a and 659b movably support the support member 661. Further, an engaging portion 657c provided at the tip end of the first arm 657a and an engaging portion 657d provided at the tip end of the second arm 657b also rotatably support the support member 661. The arm 657 is, for example, a sword-shaped member, and the slide groove 658 is formed just in the heel portion.

  Then, when the arm 675 is pivoted downward by the driving force of the motor 652, as shown in FIGS. 19 to 22, the support member 661 descends while being supported by the link member 656 and attached to the support member 661 The lifting member 665 is also lowered.

  Subsequently, the support member 661 will be described. A light blocking rib 661 a is formed on the support member 661, and the gaming machine 10 detects that the elevating unit 660 is in the initial position by blocking the detection light of the sensor 668. Further, a pair of engaging portions 661 b and 661 c are formed on the upper portion of the support member 661, and the engaging portions 661 b and 661 c are connected to the pins 673 a and 673 b engaged with the slide grooves 672 a and 672 b to support The member 661 is movably supported by the fourth movable product front base.

  In addition, an LED 669 is provided on each of the finger portions 662 a to 662 e of the support member 661 to illuminate the elevation member 665 from the rear. As described above, the elevation member 665 accommodates the finger portions 662 a to 662 e in the accommodation portions 666 a to 666 e and is attached to the elevation unit 660.

  With such a configuration, the lifting member 665 moves (lifts) between the initial position and the operating position.

〔Light guide plate〕
Next, the light guide plate 680 will be described. FIG. 23 is a view for explaining an example of the light emission mode of the light guide plate 680. As shown in FIG. 24 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of the light guide plate 680, and FIG. 25 is an enlarged cross-sectional view of another example of the light guide plate 680.

  As shown in FIG. 23, the light guide plate 680 can be viewed from the front so that the reflected light emerges as a pattern or the like by reflecting a part of the light incident from the end portion to the front. Conventionally, the light guide plate generally produced processes a part of incident light from the side surface by cutting the surface of the plate surface such as an acrylic resin plate or a polycarbonate resin plate which causes total internal reflection with a laser. It was made to emit light from the part (cutting light guide plate).

  On the other hand, in the present invention, by printing dots on a plate surface, a printing light guide plate is adopted in which the dot portion is made to emit light from the opposite side of the dot portion as a refracting portion (reflection portion, light emitting portion). The printed light guide plate is realized, for example, by inkjet technology on an acrylic plate, and can make the light guide plate itself thinner than a cut light guide plate. In addition, since the particles of the ink are several tens of micrometers (micrometers), it is possible to finely form the refracting portion (reflecting portion, light emitting portion), and it is difficult to see the light emitting pattern when there is no incident light from the side surface There is also a merit of that. Furthermore, when the incident light is white, the color of the ink brings about natural color development, and colorful light emission is possible by using inks of multiple colors. In addition, the cost is lower than that of a cut light guide plate because no printing plate or mold for laser processing is required.

  FIG. 24 is a diagram for explaining the reflection in the printing light guide plate. The LED 675, which is a means for irradiating light into the light guide plate, is an LED provided on the LED substrate 674. The refracting portion 681 represents one of the dots.

  While the refractive index of air is 1.00, acrylic resin is 1.49 to 1.53, polycarbonate (PC) resin is 1.59, and the refractive index of the ink forming the refractive portion 681 is also acrylic. It has a refractive index close to that of resin and PC resin.

  Point A shown in FIG. 24 is a point where the incident light of the LED 672 is incident from the light guide plate 680 to the refracting portion 681 and is reflected inside the refracting portion. At point A, reflection in a plurality of directions occurs, and among these, light exiting further forward through the light guide plate 680 is shown as a solid line, a short broken line, and a long broken line. In particular, almost all of the light of the solid line or the long broken line advancing at 90 ° with respect to the surface of the light guide plate 680 is emitted to the player side ahead.

  As described above, the light emission pattern provided on the light guide plate 680 is formed by planar aggregation of the convex refracting portions 681.

  Here, the irradiation unit provided on the end face of the light guide plate 680 is not limited to an LED or the like for the purpose of irradiation of visible light, and may be, for example, a black light which irradiates ultraviolet light of long wavelength. The refracting portion 681 is formed of, for example, a fluorescent paint that emits light by ultraviolet light having a long wavelength.

  Further, the ink used for the refracting portion 681 may be a photochromic pigment whose color is changed by ultraviolet light, or may be a thermochromic pigment whose color is changed by heat. The irradiation means may be a combination of LEDs, guided natural light (interior light), and black light, and the ink used for the refracting portion 681 is a pigment ink such as a photochromic pigment, a thermochromic pigment or a mineral, a dyeing ink A fluorescent paint can optionally be used.

  The light guide plate 680 may not only be arranged to cover the front surface of the display device 41, but may be arranged to cover the entire front of the game board 30, or the glass frame 15 itself may be a light guide plate.

  FIG. 25 shows another example of the printing light guide plate, and a protective member 682 is provided so as to cover the refraction section 681. As shown in FIG. While there is long dashed light reflected forward on the inner surface of the refracting portion 681, there is also light of a solid line coming out of the refracting portion 681, but light of the solid line is reflected forward by the protection member 682. The light passes through the light guide plate 680 and is emitted to the player side. Therefore, the light guide plate 680 shown in FIG. 25 provided with the protection member 682 can obtain higher luminance and can prevent the reduction in contrast due to the light traveling to the opposite side of the player side being scattered elsewhere .

  The protective member 682 is formed by coating or evaporation from above the refracting portion 681 established as a liquid crystal display manufacturing technique. Although the protection member 682 is formed in a layer shape, the reflective surface thereof does not necessarily have to be a finely parallel surface with respect to the back surface of the light guide plate 680.

  FIG. 26 is a view for explaining the case where two light guide plates are provided. FIG. 27 is a front view of two light guide plates.

  As shown in FIG. 26, in the first light guide plate (first light guide plate) 680, an effect is floated by incident light from the side, and a character is floated by incident light from the vertical (from the bottom). For example, by using an ink that reflects light in accordance with the color (wavelength) of the incident light, light having a wavelength different from that of the incident light from the longitudinal incident side is incident on the incident light, and thus different patterns are displayed. It can be made to float.

  As shown in FIG. 27A, in the first light guide plate 680, effects and characters float up when there is incident light from the vertical and horizontal directions. The first light guide plate 680 emits light, for example, when transitioning to an effect from reach, and at this timing, in the upper right area of the first light guide plate 680, the symbol variation displayed on the display device 41 is visible . In the light emission mode of the first light guide plate 680, the effect and the character may simultaneously emit light, or only one of them may emit light.

  As shown in FIG. 26 and FIG. 27, in the second light guide plate 683, a plurality of star patterns appear by the incident light from the side. The second light guide plate 683 emits light, for example, in a scene with a high degree of expectation, and at the timing, an instruction on how to hit displayed on the display device 41 can be visually recognized in the upper right region of the second light guide plate 683. Besides, the light may be emitted at the timing when the game mode changes, the timing when the gaming state changes, etc. The image displayed in the upper right area of the display device 41 is not limited to the right strike instruction, and the symbol, icon, start It may be a memory display or the like.

  By the way, in the case of incident light from only a part of the end, the part floating on the light guide plate is also a part. Therefore, by controlling the light emission and non-light emission of each of the LEDs 675 entering the light guide plate, for example, it is possible to make the light guide plate appear in order.

  FIG. 28 is a front view of the first light guide plate 680 for describing a light emission mode in the case where the LEDs 675 are sequentially lighted in the vertical direction. (A) to (C) of FIG. 28 are the cases where the LED 675 is made to emit light sequentially from the top, and (S) to (T) are the cases where the LED 675 is made to emit light sequentially from the upper and lower ends.

  In (A), the three special symbols are fluctuating in the central display region 260 of the display device 41, and the incident light L1 is incident on the first light guide plate 680 because the top LED 675 emits light. . Here, due to the incident light L1, only the upper part of the effect floats above the special symbol moving in the center.

  In (B), the special symbol is a reach aspect in the central display area 260 of the display device 41, and the incident light L1 and L2 is incident on the first light guide plate 680 because the second LED 675 is also emitted. is there. Here, the upper and middle portions of the effect are raised above the reach state at the center by the incident light of L1 and L2. Therefore, since the effect does not overlap with the special symbol in the middle at the center, the visual recognition of the special symbol is not hindered.

  In (C), the special symbol during variation is displayed small in the upper right display area 263 of the display device 41, and “CANCEL” is displayed in the central display area 260, and the third LED 675 from the top also emits light This is a state in which the incident lights L1 to L3 are incident on the first light guide plate 680. Here, incident light from L1 to L3 highlights all of the effects.

  In this manner, the light emission area of the first light guide plate 680 can be gradually expanded by sequentially turning on the LED 675, and the player is given a sense of expectation by the light emission mode different from the conventional all light emission. it can. In addition, the light emission area can be reduced by sequentially turning off the LED 675. Furthermore, it is not necessary to prepare a plurality of light guide plates in changing the light emitting area, and more colorful and moving effects can be achieved.

  In (S), "right-handed →" is displayed small in the upper right display area 263, and the top LED 675 and the bottom LED 675 emit light, whereby the incident lights L1 and L4 enter the first light guide plate 680. It is in a state of being Here, the stars in the top row and the stars in the bottom row emit light due to the incident light of L1 and L4.

  (T) is a state in which incident lights L1 to L4 are incident on the first light guide plate 680 because the second LED 675 from the top and the third LED 675 from the top emit light. Here, all the rows of stars emit light due to the incident light from L1 to L4. Therefore, the star pattern covers the entire front of the display device 41 and functions as a shutter that just hides the display screen of the display device 41.

  Here, the light emission mode has been described in which the shutter is closed from the top and the bottom to the center, but the light emission mode like a shutter may be a mode from the left to the right, from one side to the other It may be an aspect like going. As described above, since the second light guide plate 683 can provide a shutter like effect without providing a movable character and performing a shutter effect, the shutter function can be realized with a space saving, power saving, and low cost configuration. it can.

  FIG. 29 is a front view of the second light guide plate 683 for describing a light emission mode in the case where the LEDs 675 sequentially emit light in the lateral direction.

  (A) is a state where the first LED 675 emits light and the start memory display M1 floats up based on the generation of the first start memory. The start-up memory display M1 may be displayed only by the light emission of the second light guide plate 683 or the start-up memory display displayed on the display device 41 and the light emission of the second light guide plate 683 overlap (or emphasize the outline) May be displayed.

  In (B), the second LED 675 emits light based on the generation of the second start storage, and the start storage display M2 is in a floating state.

  As described above, by displaying the starting memory display by the light guide plate, it is possible to produce a light-emitting effect unique to the light guide plate. Naturally, only the pre-reading display may be displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate, or all the display of the start memory including the pre-reading effect may be displayed by the light emission of the light guide plate. As an aspect of the pre-reading effect, the start memory may be blinked by light emission of the light guide plate, or gradation may be displayed, or the light emission color of the light guide plate may be changed by changing the color of the incident light.

  Here, although the aspect which displays a starting memory display one by one horizontally by a light-guide plate was demonstrated, a starting memory display may be displayed longitudinally.

  Moreover, although starting memory | storage display was mentioned as an example displayed sequentially in the horizontal direction by a light-guide plate, display of an item, a character, etc. may be sufficient. Furthermore, although it is assumed that a plurality of light guide plates are required, it is also possible to express the movement of the character with a light guide plate like a flip flop by changing the pattern floating in the same place. .

  FIG. 30 is a view for explaining the size of the refracting portion 681 provided in the light guide plate 680. As shown in FIG. (A) is an enlarged view of a part on the right side near the light source, and (B) is an enlarged view of a part on the left side away from the light source.

  The refracting portion 681 provided on the front side with respect to the light source releases a part of the incident light from the total reflection, so that the incident light is attenuated as it is separated from the light source. Therefore, as shown in (A), even if the incident light is attenuated, the refracting portions 681 are provided closer as they are farther from the light source or the refracting portions are provided closer to the light source. Many incident light can be refracted.

  Also, as shown in (B), by providing the refracting portions 681 more sparsely at locations closer to the light source or at locations where the refracting portions are not provided on the light source side, most of the incident light is supplied downstream. Make it

  Here, the size of each of the refracting portions 681 is reduced as the location where the refracting portions 681 are provided densely, but the density may be merely changed, and the size of the refracting portions 681 may be uniform.

  As described above, by changing the density and the size of the refracting portion 681 according to the attenuation amount of the incident light, uniform light emission can be achieved in the entire light guide plate 680.

  FIG. 31 is a front view of the game board 30 in a state where the second light guide plate 683 emits light entirely.

  The gaming state shown in FIG. 31 is the power support state, and in the upper left display area 262, “the remaining 77 times” and the number of remaining power support are displayed. Further, in the upper right display area 263, a right-handed と and a right-handed instruction are displayed. Furthermore, since the upper decoration rotating body group 580 and the right decoration rotating body group 630 rotate clockwise, and arcs are drawn from the left to the lower right so that the LED flows in a wavelike manner as indicated by the thick arrows, It is notified that it is right-handed timing as the whole board 30.

  As described above, a beginner can be instructed by a plurality of right-handed instructions (right-handed instructions in the upper right display area 263, right-handed instructions according to the rotation direction of the decoration rotating body, right-handed instructions according to the light emission of the LED). However, it is possible to easily grasp the timing of the right strike, and it is possible to suppress the wasted ball due to a mistake in how to hit the normal strike and the special strike.

  And although three special symbols are changing in the display device 41, since the screen effect with a high degree of expectation is finished just before, the second light guide plate 683 is divided into the screen effect displayed on the display device 41 as a shutter It is in the state of light emission so as to put

  In this manner, by displaying the variation of the special symbol by the display device 41 while the shutter is displayed by the second light guide plate 683, the display device is displayed by the light transmitting property of the light guide plate while the shutter once divides the screen effect. It is possible to make the player visually recognize the change of the special symbol displayed on 41.

  Further, since the refracting portion is not provided in the upper right region of the second light guide plate 683, the right-handed instruction display displayed in the upper right display region 263 of the display device 41 is heavy with the shutter even while the shutter is displayed. In addition, the strike indication is always visible to the player.

  Since the light emission pattern is not provided in a partial area of the light guide plate, the player can visually recognize the image displayed on the display device 41 even if long effects are performed by the light guide plate. The player does not misidentify the screen.

[One embodiment of the present invention]
The following invention can be mentioned as invention regarding the light-guide plate demonstrated so far.

  (1) A display device capable of displaying effects relating to a game, a transparent light guide plate disposed in front of the display device and having a light emission pattern that emits light by light incident from the end face, and an end face of the light guide plate And an irradiation unit capable of irradiating light to the inside of the light guide plate, and a light guide capable of emitting light from the irradiation unit to cause the light emission pattern of the light guide plate to emit light. A game machine comprising: light plate control means, wherein the light emission pattern is formed by planar aggregation of convex refracting portions provided on the surface of the light guide plate.

  (2) The irradiation unit includes a plurality of irradiation units, and the light guide plate control unit can control the light emission area of the light emission pattern to expand or contract by sequentially turning on and off the irradiation units. The gaming machine according to (1), characterized in that

  (3) The display device can display specific information on a game in a predetermined display area, the light emission pattern is formed so as not to overlap the predetermined display area in front view, and the specific information is displayed. When displayed, the movable role object arranged at the outer peripheral portion of the display device operates. The gaming machine according to (1) or (2).

  (4) The irradiation unit is disposed in the horizontal direction and the vertical direction of the end face of the light guide plate, and in the light guide plate, one light emission pattern is emitted by the light of the irradiation unit in the horizontal direction. A game machine according to any one of (1) to (3), wherein a light emission pattern different from the one light emission pattern is emitted by the light of the irradiation means.

  (5) The light guide plate control means can sequentially turn on or off the irradiation unit from the irradiation unit on one side of the irradiation unit to the irradiation unit on the other side, and the center of the irradiation unit The game machine according to any one of (2) to (4), wherein the irradiation unit can be turned on or off in order from the irradiation unit of the unit to the irradiation unit of the corner.

  (6) It is possible to execute a game based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, and to impart a predetermined gaming value based on the result of the game, and to execute the game acquired based on the establishment of the start condition The gaming machine according to any one of (2) to (5), characterized in that light can be emitted to the light guide plate as a start memory indication.

  (7) The refracting portion is an ink printed on the light guide plate, and the color of the ink is changed by heat or ultraviolet light supplied to the ink. Of gaming machines.

[Fifth movable character unit]
FIG. 32 is an exploded perspective view of the fifth movable service unit 700. As shown in FIG. When the first arm 710 is rotated by the driving force of the motor 706, the fifth movable part 720 moves up and down. The first arm 710 corresponds to a power transmission unit, and the elevating base 721 corresponds to a movable unit. In addition, the cover 730 corresponds to a decorative portion.

  The fifth movable part base 701, which is a base member of the fifth movable part unit 700, is a substantially rectangular base member, and slide grooves 702 and 703 for guiding the fifth movable part 720 are provided in the central portion. In the fifth movable part base 701, a sensor 704 for detecting that the fifth movable part 720 is in the initial position is provided at the lower left portion, and a shaft 705 for pivotally supporting the first arm 710 is provided at the lower right portion. Be

  The first arm 710 is an “く” shaped arm pivotally supported on the shaft 705 in the bearing 712. At the base end of the first arm 710 where the bearing 712 is provided, a driven gear 711 engaged with the main driving gear 707 is formed to form a gear portion 710b. The first arm 710 includes an arm portion 710a, a gear portion 710b, and an arm tip portion 710c, and a slide groove 714 in which a pin 713 is slidably fitted is formed in the arm tip portion 710c.

  The pin 713 is engaged with an engaging portion 724 provided on the elevating base 721 to support the elevating base 721. The lifting base 721 is a crescent-shaped base member supported by three legs, and includes an LED substrate 722 on the front surface. The LED substrate 722 is provided with a wire 723, and the LED 723 a is provided on the route of the wire 723. The wires 723 are silk-printed on the LED substrate 722 by the conductive member so that grouping of lighting control of the LEDs on the same substrate can be seen at a glance.

  Further, a slide portion 725 slidably engaged with the guide 726 (see FIG. 34), an engagement portion 724 engaged with the pin 713, and an engagement portion engaged with the slide groove 703 in the elevation base 721. 721a is provided.

  A decorated cover 730 is attached to the front of the lifting base 721, and the cover 730 is illuminated by the LED 723a.

  FIG. 33 is a front view of the fifth movable part unit 700 in which the fifth movable part 720 is in the initial position, and FIG. 34 is a front view in the same operating position.

  When the fifth movable part 720 is in the initial position, the light-shielding rib 725a provided on the elevation base 721 shields the detection light of the sensor 704, so that the fifth movable part 720 is in the initial position. To detect

  Then, when the gear portion 710b is rotated clockwise by the driving force of the motor 706, the fifth movable part 720 rises obliquely upward to the right by the clockwise rotation of the first arm 710.

[Another example of the fifth movable role unit]
Next, another example of the fifth movable service unit 700 will be described. In another example of the fifth movable role unit 700, the cover (decorative portion) 730 is pivoted up to be in the second state after the fifth movable role 720 goes up to be in the first state. Here, the first arm 710 and the second arm 740 correspond to a power transmission unit, and the elevation base 721 corresponds to a movable unit. In addition, the cover 730 corresponds to a decorative portion.

  FIG. 35 is a front view of another example fifth movable service unit 700 in which the fifth movable product 720 is in the initial position, FIG. 36 is a front view in the first state, and FIG. It is a front view in 2 states. FIG. 38 is a view for explaining an example of the shape of the arm distal end portion 740c of the second arm 740. As shown in FIG.

  In another example, the fifth movable character unit 700 passes the first state in which the fifth movable character member 720 is lifted by the first arm 710, and the fifth movable character member 720 is rotated about 25 degrees clockwise by the second arm 740. It is operable to the second state, which is the pivoted position.

  As shown in FIG. 35, a second arm 740 is attached to the fifth example movable service base 701 of another example. Similar to the first arm 710, the second arm 740 includes an arm portion 740a, a gear portion 740b, and an arm tip portion 740c, and the gear 741 provided on the gear portion 740b is engaged with the gear 711 of the first arm.

  A rib 725 b is formed on the lower surface of the lift base 721, and a slide groove 727 is provided on the rib 725 b. The engaging portion 721a is slidably engaged with the slide groove 727.

  As shown in FIGS. 36 and 37, when the first arm 710 is rotated clockwise by the driving force of the motor 706, the second arm 740 is rotated counterclockwise and the arm tip 740c is engaged with the engaging portion 721a. Abut on. At this time, the lifting base 721 is raised until the arm tip 740 c completely pushes in the pin 713 and the engaging portion 724. When the arm tip 740c starts pushing the pin 713 and the engaging portion 724, the moving amount of the elevation base 721 may be regulated.

  Furthermore, when the arm distal end portion 740c pushes the engaging portion 721a to the left by the rotation of the second arm 740, the fifth movable portion 720 is provided near the center on the back surface side of the fifth movable portion 720. Turning clockwise around a motion axis (not shown), the crescent-shaped decoration 730 is converted to the second state to be raised. At this time, in the first state, the elevation base (movable portion) 721 and the cover (decorative portion) 730 are not separated, but in the second state, a part of the cover (decorative portion) 730 is the elevation base (movable portion) It will be separated from 721.

  A biasing member is attached to the back side of the cover (decorative part) 730 between the cover (decorative part) 730 and the elevating base 721, and the fifth movable part 720 is in the second state by the biasing member. Can be converted to the first state.

  Here, the shape of the arm tip portion 740c of the second arm 740 is formed to any one of the shapes shown in (A) to (C) of FIG. The arm distal end portion 740c shown in FIG. 38A has a linear shape with respect to the engaging portion 721a, and pushes the engaging portion 721a into the linear portion.

  The arm tip end portion 740c shown in FIG. 38B has an arc-shaped notch portion 740e, and the engagement portion 721a is caught and pushed in the notch portion 740e. As compared with the arm distal end portion 740c of (A), the notch portion 740e catches the engaging portion 721a, so the arm distal end portion 740c does not slip and does not remove the engaging portion 721a, and the engaging portion 721a is reliably It can be pushed.

  In the arm tip 740c shown in FIG. 38C, the arm tip 740c has a downward sloping portion 740f toward the lower left, and an arc-shaped notch that catches the engagement portion 721a in the middle of the downward sloping portion 740f. The portion 740 e is formed. Since the release portion of the notched portion 740e faces the pressing direction of the engaging portion 721a as compared with the arm tip portion 740c of (B), the engaging portion 721a may be pushed with a driving force smaller than that of (B). it can.

  In this manner, turning to the second state after raising the fifth movable part 720 gives the player a greater sense of expectation compared to the operation of raising only the fifth movable part 720. be able to.

〔Time chart〕
Next, the operation timing of the fifth movable part 720 will be described. FIG. 39 is a time chart illustrating an example of left hit instruction effect and operation timing of the fifth movable product 720. FIG. 40 is a time chart illustrating the predetermined effect and the operation timing of the fifth movable product 720. Note that the left hitting instruction display indicates a hitting instruction to be displayed in the upper right display area 263 of the display device 41 as “<left hitting”.

  As shown in FIG. 39, when the power support state ends at time T1, a left hitting instruction is displayed, and the motor 557 for the second movable part and the motor 607 for the third movable part switch from OFF to CCW, The second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a rotate counterclockwise at the same time.

  Also, in order to notify that the gaming state changes at time T1, the motor 706 of the fifth movable role switches from OFF to CCW, and the cover (decorative part) 730 gradually rises while being separated from the elevating base 721 Move to the second state.

  Next, when the variable display game of the special view 1 is executed at time T2, the gaming machine 10 determines that the player is hitting the left, turns off the left hitting instruction display, and the second movable role And the motor 607 of the third movable part is turned off. In the period from time T1 to time T2, the motor 557 and the third movable part of the second movable part are provided from the viewpoint of prolonging the life of the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a and saving power. It is not necessary to always set the object motor 607 to CCW, and OFF and CCW may be repeated at regular intervals.

  Further, at time T2, the motor 706 of the fifth movable combination switches from OFF to CW, and the rising cover (decorative part) 730 is converted to the first state and descends (moves to the initial position).

  In addition, time T2 to turn off the left-handed instruction display is not limited to the start of the special view 1 variation display game, but the timing at which the number of reserved general drawing variation display games becomes zero and the effect with high expectation are started The timing may be the timing at which the fanfare starts, or the timing at which a predetermined period has elapsed from time T1.

  In the time chart shown in FIG. 40, the variable display game started at T2 is a game with high expectation, a predetermined effect (for example, SP reach) is started, and the effect is developed at time T3. Then, at time T3 when the effect develops, the motor 706 of the fifth movable combination switches from OFF to CCW, and the fifth movable combination 720 rises while rising again. In addition, the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a repeatedly repeat from stop to stop, stop to reverse, and reverse to stop every short period, and the height of expectation is notified.

  Here, when an event occurs in which the fifth movable role object 720 moves to the operating position at a timing when the fifth movable role object 720 does not move to the initial position, moving to the operating position at that timing The fifth movable part 720 can be put in a stopped state. Further, the same applies to the event occurrence at the timing when the fifth movable part 720 can not move from the initial position to the operation position.

  Thus, when the operation timing of the fifth movable part 720 occurs at the timing when the fifth movable part 720 can not move from the initial position to the operation position, the operation of the fifth movable part 720 at the operation timing is By looking back, the fifth movable character object 720 does not operate at an unnatural timing (at a delayed timing) and does not interfere with the rendering. In addition, by not moving at the timing when the fifth movable role object 720 should move (stop state), it is possible to give the player an impression that a rare effect is performed, and to enhance the interest of the game. Furthermore, since the fifth movable character object 720 is not subjected to an excessive load that is applied, it leads to prolonging the life of the character.

  Note that the movement of the fifth movable part 720 and the state change of the cover 730 (the state change between the first state and the second state) may be executed based on the change of the gaming state or the change of the probability state.

[Left strike instruction]
FIG. 41 is a front view of the game board 30 immediately after the end of the power support state. Here, the screen display displayed on the display device 41, the light emission mode of the light guide plates 680 and 683, and the operation of the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a will be described. The thick arrows indicate the direction in which the decorative light propagates in a wavelike manner.

  In front of the display device 41, the fifth movable part 720 is located at the operating position, and the entire surface of the second light guide plate 683 provided on the display device 41 emits light and the shutter is lowered. ing.

  In the central display area 260 of the display device 41, all three special symbols are changing, and in the lower right display area 264, the same symbol fluctuation as the special symbol displayed in the central display area 260 is displayed small There is. The small special symbol is also displayed in the lower right display area 264 in a smaller size because it is displayed in the lower right display area 264 when the special symbol displayed in the central display area 260 by the fifth movable character object 720 is not visible. This is to make it possible to confirm the symbol being changed by the special symbol.

  Further, in the upper right display area 263, it is displayed that "タ イ ミ ン グ 左 left hit" and left hit timing, and "04" is displayed at the upper part. In the display of "04", "0" on the left side indicates the number of starting memories in the special figure 1, and "4" on the right side indicates the number of starting memories in the special figure 2.

  Then, since the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a are simultaneously turned counterclockwise, it is possible to make the player directly understand that it is the timing of the left strike. Since the LEDs included in the game board 30 emit light so as to flow in a wavelike manner from right to left in a circular arc, it is possible to give the player a refreshing feeling at the time of left-hand strike.

  In addition, it is possible to notify the left display by the light emission mode of the right display instruction LED provided in the lamp display device 80.

[One embodiment of the present invention]
The following inventions can be mentioned as inventions related to the movable part described above.

  (8) A display device capable of displaying an effect on a game and a movable part movable from the first position to the second position, the movable part transmitting power to transmit the driving force of the drive source A movable portion connected to the power transmission portion and movable to the second position, and a decorative portion attached to the movable portion so as to be separated from the movable portion, the decorative portion being movable A game machine characterized by being convertible at the second position into a first state not separated from a part and a second state separated from the movable part.

  (9) The game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and when the game results in a special result, the special gaming state for giving the player a game value advantageous to the player, and the special game state advantageous for the player It is possible to generate a specific gaming state different from the gaming state, and to control the probability to be the special result to one of a normal probability state and a high probability state higher than the normal probability state Yes, the decorative part is converted from the first state to the second state at the timing when the gaming state changes from the specific gaming state or the timing when the probability state changes. Gaming machine.

  (10) A timing at which the gaming state changes from the specific gaming state or a timing at which the probability state changes occurs before the movable role is completely moved from the first position to the second position. In this case, the movement to the first position and the conversion of the decorative portion to the second state are not performed. (9).

[Game control device]
FIG. 42 is a block diagram of a game control system of the game machine 10. The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130.

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and generates a clock serving as an operation clock of the CPU, timer interrupts, and a random number generation circuit. Oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 and the like. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 includes a normal power supply unit 410 having an ACDC converter that generates a DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V, and a DC-DC converter that generates a DC voltage of lower levels such as 12 V DC and 5 V DC from a voltage of 32 V DC. A backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at the time of a power failure, and a power failure monitoring circuit, and a power failure monitoring signal or reset signal notifying the game control apparatus 100 of the occurrence of power failure and recovery. And the like, and a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as

  In the present embodiment, the power supply device 400 is configured separately from the gaming control device 100, but the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are integrated on a separate substrate or gaming control device 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are subject to replacement at the time of model change, as in the embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a board different from the power supply 400 or the main board. By providing it, it can be removed from the target of replacement and the cost can be reduced.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with an initialization switch 112. When the initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, a process of forcibly initializing information stored in the RAM 111 c in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is performed. To be done. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111a, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111b, and a random access memory (RAM) 111c which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111b stores unchanged information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111c stores a working area of the CPU 111a and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111 b or the RAM 111 c.

  Further, the ROM 111 b stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The fluctuation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111a to refer to the fluctuation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as the start storage to determine the fluctuation pattern. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. The variation pattern (variation aspect) may include a pattern that causes a reach.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition, when the variable display areas of all the variable display areas are temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle and right variable display areas is satisfied (for example, the same identification information It is also possible to set the state (1) except that the special result aspect is a reach state, and display the remaining one variable display area from the reach state.

  The reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as a line (reach type, type) of reach effects, normal reach (N reach), Special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. The expected values (expected degree, reliability degree) are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premium reach. Further, the reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is high as compared with the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111a executes a game control program in the ROM 111b to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the big hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A random number generation circuit for generating a fluctuation pattern random number or the like for determining the fluctuation display game execution time etc. in reach display or fluctuation display without reach), and an oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 A clock generator is provided which generates a clock for giving a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 msec (milliseconds)) to the CPU 111a and an update timing of the random number generation circuit based on the clock.

  Further, the CPU 111a acquires any one fluctuation pattern table from among a plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b in the processing related to the special figure fluctuation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111a is a game result (big hit or break) of the special figure fluctuation display game, a probability state (normal probability state or high probability state) of the special figure fluctuation display game as the current gaming state, the number of starting memories One of the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables is selected and acquired based on the above. Here, the CPU 111a serves as fluctuation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one of the fluctuation pattern tables among the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111b when executing the special figure fluctuation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor 91 of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100. Control to pay out. In addition, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor 91 of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

  A radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a gate switch 34a of the common view starting gate 34, and a starting opening 1 in the first starting winning opening 36 Switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a in second start winning opening 37, start opening 3 switch 42a in third start winning opening 42, winning opening switch 35a, special winning opening switch 39a of special variation winning device 39 An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives signals of negative logic such as high level 11V and low level 7V supplied from these switches and converts them into positive logic signals of 0V-5V. ing.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Note that among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the gate switch 34a, the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the start opening 3 switch 42a, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 39a are the third input It is input to port 124.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the second input port 123.

  In addition, a detection signal of the magnetic sensor switch 61 for detecting fraud provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10, a frame radio wave fraud signal output from the payout control device 200, and a payout busy signal are provided to the second input port 123. Is input. Note that a vibration sensor switch that detects vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the second input port 123. The frame radio wave illegal signal is a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12 (body frame), and the payout busy signal is a state in which the payout control device 200 can receive a command It is a signal which shows whether or not.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the third input port 124 is also supplied from the game control apparatus 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay board 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start port 1 switch 36a, the start port 2 switch 37a and the start port 3 switch 42a are input to the gaming microcomputer 111 other than the third input port 124. It is configured.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the third input port 124 is read out by the enable signal CE2 being asserted (changed to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the third input port 124. be able to. The same applies to the second input port 123 and the first input port 122 described later.

  Further, in the input unit 120, a signal from a glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided in the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10, a signal from the front frame opening detection switch 64 provided in the front frame 12, etc. Signals, chute ball disconnection switch signals indicating lack of gaming balls before payout, overflow switch signals indicating overflow, touch switch signals based on input of touch switches provided on the operating handle 24 are taken in through the data bus 140 A first input port 122 for supplying the microcomputer 111 is provided. The overflow switch signal is a signal that is output when it is detected that the game balls are stored in the lower tray 23 for a predetermined amount or more (full).

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RST from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111, and is also supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, the reset signal RST is directly output to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, thereby turning off the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for outputting to the test injection test device. Is configured as.

  In addition, the reset signal RST may be configured to be able to be output to the direct shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Note that the reset signal RST is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RST is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RST is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with data for notifying special symbol information of the variable display game via the relay board 70 to a test firing test device of a recognized organization (not shown) connected to the data bus 140 or a signal indicating a probability of big hit. Is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test injection test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor switch 61 or the radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 to the trial shot test apparatus via the buffer 133 and the relay board 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done.

  The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits the signal line of the detection signal of the switch that does not pass the buffer. There is. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay substrate 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  Further, the output unit 130 is opened / closed data of a solenoid (general power solenoid) 37 c connected to the data bus 140 to open the normal fluctuation winning device 37 and a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 39 b opening the special fluctuation winning device 39. A second output port 134 for output is provided.

  The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  Further, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal 71. The external information terminal 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in a game arcade. It can be supplied to the device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Furthermore, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of the common power solenoid 37c and the large winning opening solenoid 39b output from the second output port 134 to the output unit 130. The second driver 138 b for outputting the on / off driving signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 The third driver 138c outputs the on / off drive signal of the digit line on the lead-in side, and the fourth driver 138d outputs the external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to the external device such as the management device to the external information terminal 71. It is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply apparatus 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection device 250. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 250 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

[Effect control device]
Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 (sub substrate) will be described using FIG. FIG. 43 is a block diagram of an effect control system of the gaming machine 10. As shown in FIG.

  The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing of the above, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speaker 19.

  The main control microcomputer 311 includes a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at the time of power failure. A possible FeRAM 323 and an RTC (Real Time Clock) 338 serving as a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311.

  Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights the decoration lamp, and the motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Also, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325 ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A sound ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. A decoration control command signal (rendering command) such as a decoration special drawing reserve number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the rendering control device 300 via the command I / F 331 Receive as. Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit 332 for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40), and a glass frame 15 Frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided, and a board effect provided in the game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls a device 44 (for example, a movable object or the like which cooperates with the effect display on the display device 41 to enhance the effect effect).

  These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. In addition, you may provide the frame production movable body control circuit which drive-controls frame production apparatuses, such as a motor provided in the glass frame 15. As shown in FIG.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, an effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, a touch panel 25b provided on the surface of the effect button 25, a motor in the panel effect device 44 A function to detect the on / off state of the effect combination object switch 47 (effect motor switch) for detecting an initial position etc. and input a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311, and a volume control switch provided in the effect control device 300 A switch input circuit 336 for detecting the state of 335 and inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311 is provided.

  In the present embodiment, the accessory effect switch 47 includes a sensor 564, a sensor 609, a sensor 668, a sensor 704, and the like.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the configuration as described above and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to

  Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  Next, game control performed in these control circuits will be described. The CPU 111a of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 extracts a random number value for hit determination of the common drawing based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34 The game is compared with the judgment value stored in to determine the hit / off of the common drawing fluctuation display game.

  Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined period of time, the generic image fluctuation display game in which the identification symbol is stopped and displayed is displayed. If the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is a hit, the common drawing indicator displays a special result mode, and the common power solenoid 37c is operated to move the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.3 seconds) control to open as described above. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is out of control, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the common drawing display.

  In addition, starting winning combination (starting memory) is remembered on the basis of the input of detection signal of the game ball from starting opening 1 switch 36a which is equipped to 1st starting winning a prize opening 36, special figure 1 fluctuation indicatory game of on the basis of starting memory The jackpot determination random number value is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111 b to determine the hit / off of the special view 1 variation display game.

  In addition, based on the input of the detection signal of the game ball from starting opening 2 switch 37a which is equipped to normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37, starting opening 3 switch 42a which is equipped to 3rd starting winning opening 42, starting memory is remembered, starting Based on the storage, the random number value for jackpot determination of the special view 2 variation display game is extracted and compared with the determination value stored in the ROM 111 b to determine the hit / off of the special view 2 variation display game.

  Then, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view 1 change display game or the special view 2 change display game. Then, after the identification symbol is variably displayed for a predetermined time on the special view 1 display 51 or the special view 2 display 52, a special view fluctuation display game in which a stop display is performed is displayed. That is, the variation display game is based on the winning on the start winning area (the first start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the third start winning opening 42) of the game ball flowing down the game area 32 It constitutes game control means to control the progress.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, the display device 41 displays a decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  And, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is hit, the CPU 111a of the game control device 100 displays the special result mode on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52, and generates the special gaming state. Let In the process of generating the special game state, the CPU 111a performs control to allow the game ball to flow into the winning opening, for example, by opening the opening / closing member 39c of the special variation winning device 39 by the special winning opening solenoid 39b. .

  Then, a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time (for example, 27 seconds or 0.05 second) elapses from the opening of the special winning opening. One round (R) is to open the big winning opening until a certain condition is achieved, and this is continued (repeated) control (cycle game) to repeat a predetermined number of rounds (for example, 16 times, 6 times, etc.) . That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a release, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state (probability state) is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure variation display game is higher than that in the normal probability state. In addition, even if it becomes a high probability state based on the result figure of the special figure fluctuation display game of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, the special figure 1 fluctuation display game and the special figure 2 fluctuation display game Both are high probability states.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (specific game state) as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In the time saving state, control is performed to set the regular drawing fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the time shortening operation state, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is more than when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the normal operation state. In order to control so that the open time of the subtractor is substantially increased, the normal power support state (power support state) is obtained. In addition, even in the high probability state (normal probability change state) excluding the latent probability change state, the common charge support (power support) is executed in the short time state in an overlapping manner.

  For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to reduce the time to make the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above (general drawing fluctuation time) a second fluctuation display time shorter than the normal first fluctuation display time (for example, , 10000 msec is 1000 msec). In the time saving state, the execution time of the special figure fluctuation display game (special figure fluctuation time) is also shortened than usual, and time shortening fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is also executed.

  Moreover, in the time saving state, the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game can be controlled to be a second stopping time (for example, 704 msec) shorter than the first stopping time (for example, 1604 msec) It is.

  Also, in the time saving state, when the regular drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is released, the first opening time (for example, 100 msec) of the opening time (general power release time) is the normal state. It is possible to control so that the second opening time (for example, 1352 msec) that is longer than that is obtained.

  Moreover, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game It is possible to set to the 2nd open frequency (for example, 4 times). Further, in the time saving state, it is possible to set the probability (popular drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be a high probability higher than the normal probability (low probability) in the normal operating state.

  In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of common power release, the common power release time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Thereby, in the time saving state, winning of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is facilitated more than in the normal gaming state, and the number of times of execution of the special view fluctuation display game per unit time can be increased more than in the normal gaming state. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. Further, the movable member 37b may be set so as not to open in the normal operation state (a common drawing probability is 0). In addition, either of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be selected in the case of a hit. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

[Control of game control device]
Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. Control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes main processing shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B and timer interrupt processing shown in FIG. 48 which is performed in a predetermined time cycle (for example, 4 msec).

[Main processing (game control device)]
First, the main processing will be described. 44A and 44B are flowcharts showing the procedure of the main processing by the game control device 100. The main process is started by turning on the power. In the flowchart of the process executed by the game control device 100, the sign (number) of the step is represented as "A ****".

  As shown in FIG. 44A, when the main processing is started, the gaming control apparatus 100 first executes processing for prohibiting an interrupt (A1001). Furthermore, a stack pointer setting process is performed to set a stack pointer, which is the top address of the area for saving the values of the register etc. when an interrupt occurs (A1002).

  Subsequently, register bank 0 is designated as the register bank to be used (A1003), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (A1004). For example, when the address of the RAM is in the range of 0000h to 01FFh, 00h is set as the upper address.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 outputs a signal of release prohibition and sets the release permission signal to a release state (A1005). The firing permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a firing prohibition signal, and the firing of the gaming ball is prohibited. Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 reads the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) (A1006).

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 sets a power supply delay timer (A1007). Program of secondary control means (for example, payout control device 200 and effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with instructions from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value in the power supply delay timer The standby time (for example, 3 seconds) for waiting until the system starts up normally is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) boots up, and the slave control apparatus Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power supply delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. It can be detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  When the power supply delay timer is set (A1007), the game control device 100 executes the counting of the standby time and the process of monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the standby time (A1008 to A1012).

  When the power failure monitoring process is started, the game control device 100 first sets the number of times (for example, twice) to read and check the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply device 400 via the port and the data bus ( A1008) It is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on (A1009).

  When the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1009 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether the power failure monitoring signal continues to be on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1008. It judges (A1010). Then, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks is not continued (the result of A1010 is "N"), the process returns to the process of determining whether the power failure monitoring signal is on in step A1009.

  In addition, when the on state of the blackout monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (result of A1010 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that the blackout has occurred, the gaming control apparatus 100 is a gaming machine. Wait until the power is turned off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, when the power failure monitoring signal is not on (result of A1009 is "N"), that is, when no power failure occurs, the game control device 100 updates the power on delay timer by -1 (A1011), It is determined whether the value of the timer is 0 (A1012). If the value of the timer is not 0 (the result of A1012 is "N"), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal in step A1008.

  In addition, when the value of the timer is 0 (the result of A1012 is “Y”), that is, when the standby time is over, the game control apparatus 100 can read and write RWM (read-write such as RAM or EEPROM). Memory access is permitted (A1013), and off data is output to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (A1014).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a serial port (a port provided in advance in the game microcomputer 111, which is used for communication with the effect control apparatus 300 and the payout control apparatus 200 in the present embodiment) (A1015). ). Furthermore, it is determined whether the initialization switch has been turned on from the state of the first input port 122 read in advance (A1016).

  When the initialization switch is off (the result of A1016 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the blackout inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal blackout inspection area check data. (A1017). Then, if it is normal (the result of A1017 is "Y"), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection area check data (A1018).

  Furthermore, if the value of the blackout inspection area 2 is normal (the result of A1018 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 executes checksum calculation processing for calculating a checksum of a predetermined area in the RWM (A1019) Then, it is determined whether the calculated checksum and the checksum at power-off match (A1020). If the checksums match (the result of A1020 is "Y"), the process proceeds to the process of step A1021 of FIG. 44B, and the process when normal recovery from the power failure is performed is executed.

  In addition, when the initialization switch is on (result of A1016 is “Y”), when it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (the result of A1017 is “N”) Alternatively, if the result of A1018 is "N" and the checksum is not normal (the result of A1020 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1026 of FIG. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

  The game control apparatus 100 saves the initial value at the time of power failure recovery in the area to be initialized (A1021). The areas to be initialized are areas related to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area, and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 checks the area storing the gaming state in the RWM, and determines whether the gaming state is in the high probability state (A1022).

  Here, when the gaming state is not in the high probability state (the result of A1022 is “N”), the game control device 100 skips the processing of step A1023 and step A1024, and shifts to the processing of step A1025. Also, when the gaming state is a high probability state (result of A 1022 is "Y"), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (A 1023), for example, the high probability notification LED provided in the collective display device 50 The (error indicator) on (lit) data is saved in the segment area (A1024). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (A1025), step A1031 Execute the process

  On the other hand, when the processing of step A1026 is executed after the execution of steps A1016, A1017, A1018 and A1020, the game control apparatus 100 sets the RAM access prohibited area to access permission (A1026). Further, all RAM areas including the busy signal status area are cleared to 0 (A1027), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (A1028).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the initial value at the time of the RAM initialization in the area to be initialized (A1029). The area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demo area and the effect mode. Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 transmits a command at the time of RAM initialization to the effect control board (A1030), and executes the processing of step A1031.

  Note that the command for power recovery and transmitted in the process of step A1025 and the command for RAM initialization transmitted in the process of step A1030 include a model specification command indicating the type of gaming machine, and the number of reserved special views 51. It includes an ornament special drawing 1 reservation number command and an ornament special drawing 2 reservation number command to be shown, and a probability information command indicating a state of probability. In addition, depending on the state of power off or power on, if the special view variation display game is being executed at the time of power off, the recovery screen command, if it is waiting for the customer at power off, the customer waiting demo command If it is initialized at power on, it includes a power on command. Furthermore, a rendering mode information command indicating the state of the rendering mode depending on the model, and a time saving information command indicating the number of remaining games in the time saving state are included. The command at the time of RAM initialization also includes a command for RAM initialization.

  The game control apparatus 100 activates a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator) (A1031). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111a based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After executing the CTC activation process of step A1031, the game control apparatus 100 activates and sets the random number generation circuit (A1032). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit in a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111a. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed.

  The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines

  In the present embodiment, by replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be improved. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  After that, the game control device 100 extracts the value of a predetermined register (soft random number register 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit when the power is turned on, and the corresponding various initial value random numbers (random numbers determining the big hit symbol (big hit symbol) Random number 1, big hit symbol random number 2), random number which determines hit of common figure (hit random number), predetermined value area of RWM as initial value (start value) of random number which determines hit symbol of common figure (hit symbol random number) Save (A1033) and permit the interrupt (A1034). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111a used in this embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. Therefore, this value is used as the initial value (start value) of various initial value random numbers. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes an initial value random number update process for updating the values of various initial value random numbers and breaking the regularity of the random numbers (A1035). Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number are configured to be generated using the random number generated in the random number generation circuit. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number is the same cycle as the timer interrupt processing which is the processing unit of the program. The “low-speed counter” is updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2) different from CTC (CTC 0) of timer interrupt processing).

  In the jackpot symbol random number and the hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value changing method" is employed in which the start value is changed using each initial value random number (generated by software) every round of the random number. Each of the random numbers may be a counter-type update by +1 or 1, or may be a random-type update in which all values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, the big hit symbol random number, and the hit random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step A1035, the game control apparatus 100 sets the number of times the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 is read and checked via the port and the data bus (A1036). It is determined whether the signal is on (A1037). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (the result of A1037 is "N"), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process of step A1035. That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (A1034) before the initial value random number update process (A1035), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is initially performed. It is possible to avoid pressure on the interrupt process by being made to wait by the value random number update process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing in step A1035, and when such a method is adopted, the initial value random number is updated in both. In order to avoid the execution of the update process, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update it to release the interrupt. On the other hand, when the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed as in the present embodiment and only in the main process, there is no problem even if the interrupt is canceled before the initial value random number update process. Rather, it has the advantage of simplifying the main processing.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (the result of A1037 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the power failure monitoring signal is still on for the number of checks set in the process of step A1036. It determines (A1038). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal for the number of checks has not continued (the result of A1038 is "N"), the process returns to step A1037, and it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal is on.

  In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (result of A1038 is “Y”), that is, when it is determined that the power failure has occurred, the game control device 100 interrupts once. Is inhibited (A1039), and off data is output to all output ports (A1040).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves the power failure inspection area check data 1 in the power failure inspection region 1 (A1041), and saves the power failure inspection region check data 2 in the power failure inspection region 2 (A1042). Further, a checksum calculation process is performed to calculate a checksum at the time of power supply interruption of the RWM (A1043), and the calculated checksum is saved (A1044). Finally, processing for prohibiting access to the RWM is executed (A1045), and the process waits until the power of the gaming machine is shut off.

  As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is based on the RAM 111c capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of external operation, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111c is provided, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111c after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 45 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the checksum calculation process. The checksum calculation process is executed in steps A1019 and A1043 of the main process shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the head address of the RWM as the start value of the calculated address (A1101). Then, the number of repetitions is set (A1102), and "0" is set as the calculated value (A1103). The number of bytes of RAM being used is set to the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address as a new calculated value (A1104), updates the calculated address by +1 (A1105), and updates the number of repetitions by -1 (A1106). Then, it is determined whether the calculation of the checksum is completed (A1107).

  When the calculation of the checksum is not completed (the result of A1107 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 repeats the processing from step A1104 to step A1107. In addition, when the calculation of the checksum is completed (the result of A1107 is “Y”), the checksum calculation process is ended.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
FIG. 46 is a flowchart of an initial value random number updating process. The initial value random number updating process is executed in step A1035 of the main process shown in FIGS. 44A and 44B.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates the jackpot symbol initial value random number by +1 (increases by 1) (A1201). Subsequently, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1202), the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (A1203), and the initial value random number updating process is ended.

  Here, "big hit design initial value random number" is the random number which becomes the initial value of the random number which decides the big hit stop design of the special figure. In addition, "the winning initial value random number" is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hitting of the common drawing variation game, and "the winning design initial value random number" is a random number of determining the hitting stopping symbol of the common drawing. It is a random number that becomes an initial value.

  As described above, by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing, the randomness of the random number can be improved.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 47 is a flowchart of the timer interrupt process. The timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111a. When a timer interrupt occurs in the gaming microcomputer 111, timer interrupt processing is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, the game control apparatus 100 first designates register bank 1 as a register bank to be used (A1301), and sets the upper address of the RAM top address in a predetermined register (A1302). Switching from register bank 0 used in the main process to register bank 1 at the start of the timer interrupt process is equivalent to saving the register used in the main process. When timer interrupt processing is started, the interrupt is automatically disabled.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes input processing from various sensors and switches and capturing of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (A1303). Further, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process for performing drive control of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 39b) is executed (A1304). When the signal of emission prohibition is output in the processing of step A1005 in the main processing, the emission permission signal is output by the output processing being performed, and the emission permission signal is set to be in the permission state. .

  Next, the game control device 100 executes payout command transmission processing for outputting the command set in the transmission buffer in the various processing to the payout control device 200 (A1305), and further, random number update processing 1 (A1306), random number update Process 2 (A1307) is executed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the start opening 3 switch 42a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a and the big winning opening switch 39a A prize hole switch / status monitoring process is performed to monitor (a front frame or a glass frame is not open, etc.) (A1308).

  Furthermore, the special figure game process which performs the process related to the special figure variation display game is executed (A1309), and then the popular figure game process which performs the process related to the popular figure variation display game is performed (A1310).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes segment LED editing processing which is provided in the gaming machine 10 and drives a segment LED for displaying special game variation game display and various information related to the game to display desired content. (A1311).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 executes a magnet fraud monitoring process to check whether or not there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61 (A1312). Further, a radio wave fraud monitoring process (board radio wave fraud monitoring process) is executed to check whether or not there is an abnormality by checking the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 of the game board (A1313).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 executes external information editing processing for setting signals to be output to various external devices in the output buffer (A1314). Thereafter, the timer interrupt process is ended. Note that although restoration of the interrupt disabled state and restoration of specification of the register bank are performed automatically at the time of timer interrupt processing return, depending on the CPU used, interrupts are permitted after external information editing processing. It is also possible to carry out the processing to be performed and the processing to return the designation of the register bank to register bank 0.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (A1303) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 48 is a flowchart of the input process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first reads the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 122 (A1401). Then, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1402).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves (stores) the read input port 1, that is, the state of the first input port 122 in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (A1403). Subsequently, after preparing the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 (A1404), the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM is prepared (A1405). Subsequently, unused bit data is prepared (A1406), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1407). Then, the switch reading process is executed (A1408). Here, "prepare" in the present embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM (A1409), and prepares the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 (A1410). Further, unused bit data is prepared (A1411), and bit data to be inverted is prepared (A1412). Further, thereafter, the switch reading process is executed (A1413), and the input process is ended.

[Switch reading process]
Next, the details of the switch reading process (A1408, A1413) in the above-described input process will be described. FIG. 49 is a flowchart of the switch reading process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first reads the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1501). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1502), the bit requiring the inversion is inverted (A1503), and the port input state 1 of the target switch control area is saved ( Store (A 1504). After that, the process waits until the delay time (0.1 ms) until the second reading elapses (A1505).

  When the delay time (0.1 ms) has elapsed, the game control apparatus 100 performs the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port (A1506). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (A1507), the bit requiring inversion is inverted (A1508), and the port input state of the target switch control area (first data) ) And save the inverted data (the second data) (A1509). After that, a definite bit pattern is created in which the bit in the same state is 1 and the bit different is 0 in the first and second readings (A1510), the logical bit of the bit pattern and port input state 2 is taken, and this is fixed It is assumed that it is a bit (A1511).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 creates an indeterminate bit pattern in which the state of the same bit is 0 and the different bit is 1 in the first read and the second read (A 1512), and the indeterminate bit pattern and the previous interrupt are generated. The logical product with the fixed state is taken and it is set as the previous hold bit (A1513). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed.

  Then, the game control device 100 combines the current determination bit and the previous holding bit, and saves it as the current determination state (A1514). Furthermore, the exclusive OR of the previous and current defined states is taken and saved as a rising edge (A1515). Thereafter, the switch reading process is ended.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading changes the signal by reading the switch once each for each interrupt processing and comparing with the result of the previous reading. Although there is a method of determining whether or not the switch has been read, it may not be possible to correctly determine if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost until the next interrupt processing. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interrupt process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (A1304) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. FIG. 50 is a flowchart of the output process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first outputs (resets) off data to the port 135 (see FIG. 3) that outputs segment data of the collective display device (LED) 50 (A1601). Next, the data output to the solenoid output port 134 for outputting data of the special winning opening solenoid 39b is synthesized and output (A1602).

  Then, the gaming control device 100 updates the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit line of the batch display device (LED) 50 (A1603). Further, the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is acquired (A1604). Then, the acquired data and external information data are combined (A1605), and the combined data is output to the digit output / external information output port 136 (A1606). Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (A1607), and the loaded data is output to the port 135 for segment output (A1608).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 loads and combines data to be output to the external information terminal 71 (A1609), and further combines the combined data and the output data of the release permission (A1610), and finally combines them. The data is output to the external information / fire permission signal output port 137 (A1611). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (A1612). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (A1613).

  Next, the game control device 100 loads and combines data to be output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test device, and the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 The synthesized data is output (A1614). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal of the test shooting tester is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 ( A 1615). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (A1616), the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (A1305) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 51 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the payout command transmission process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (A 1701). The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111 c of the game control device 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10). In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments by collating these two signals.

  Each of these winning number counter areas is provided with a winning number counter area according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (for example, 3 winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls). The count number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This means that while the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination, and more unsent This is because data may be accumulated.

  In the process of checking whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 of step A1701, the game control apparatus 100 determines the number of winnings to be checked among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number. It is determined whether there is a count number other than "0" in the number counter area.

  When there is no count number in the winning number counter area 2 (the result of A1701 is "N"), the game control device 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked (A1702). Further, it is determined whether the check of the count numbers of all the winning number counter areas is completed (A1703).

  When all checks have been completed (the result of A1703 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 proceeds to the processing of step A1712. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1703 is "N"), the process returns to the process of step A1701, and the processes from step A1701 to step A1703 are repeated.

  Further, when there is a count number (the result of A1701 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 subtracts the count number of the target number-of-players counter area by 1 (A1704), and the number-of-awards counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address of is acquired (A1705). Then, the value of the winning balls remaining number area and the number of payouts are added (A1706), and the addition result is saved as a new remaining winning balls number in the remaining winning balls area (A1707). As the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before the process of step A1707, a fraction not satisfying the predetermined number serving as the reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 subtracts 10 from the addition result (A1708), and determines whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (A1709). Then, if it is not 0 or more (the result of A1709 is "N"), the process proceeds to step A1712. On the other hand, if it is 0 or more (the result of A1709 is "Y"), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (A1710), and the subtraction result is saved in the prize ball remaining number area (A1711) , And further return to the process of step A1708.

  By the above processing, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.

  If the payout command transmission timer is not 0, the game control apparatus 100 updates −1 (A1712), and determines whether or not the payout command transmission timer has become 0 (A1713). If the payout command transmission timer is not 0 (the result of A1713 is “N”), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is 0 (the result of A1713 is "Y"), it is determined whether the payout busy signal status (flag) is in a busy state (busy state flag) (A1714).

  The payout busy signal is a signal indicating whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is on (busy state) when the payout control can not be immediately started. It is assumed. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control. The payout busy signal status (flag) is information for setting whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control based on the state of the payout busy signal, and is an idle that can immediately start payout control. A state, a busy state in which the payout control can not be started immediately, or an indeterminate state in which the state is indeterminate are set.

  When the payout busy signal status is busy (result of A1714 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the payout command transmission process. The non-busy state includes the idle state and the indefinite state. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The undefined state is set, for example, by clearing the busy signal status area in the process when the power is turned on. In this undetermined state, the idle state or the busy state is set based on the state of the payout busy signal being maintained for a predetermined period of time to indicate that the payout control can or can not be started immediately Eliminate it with That is, even if a status signal indicating that dispensing control can be started is output from the dispensing control device 200 when a power failure occurs and returns from the power outage, the winning ball command is immediately issued to the dispensing control device 200. In response to the status signal indicating that dispensing control can be started is continuously output over a predetermined period from the dispensing control device 200 without transmitting, a winning ball command is transmitted to the dispensing control device 200. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

  When the payout busy signal status is not busy (result of A1714 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 checks whether or not there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (A1715). In the process of checking whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1, among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, the number of counts other than "0" is in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is.

  Then, when there is no count number (the result of A1715 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked (A1716), and all the winning number counter areas are It is determined whether the check of the count number is completed (A1717). If all the checks have been completed (the result of A1717 is “Y”), the payout command transmission process is ended. On the other hand, if all the checks have not been completed (the result of A1717 is “N”), the process returns to the process of step A1715, and the processes from step A1715 to A1717 are repeated.

  In addition, when there is a counted number (the result of A1715 is “Y”), the game control device 100 subtracts the counted number of the targeted winning number counter area by 1 (A1718), and the targeted winning number counter The payout command corresponding to the area is acquired (A1719). Then, the payout command (payout number command) is stored in the payout serial transmission buffer (A1720), an initial value is set in the payout command transmission timer (A1721), and then the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms, for example, is set as an initial value.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, it is possible that the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means, which is output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200), can start the payout control can start the payout control. In the case of showing it, it constitutes a winning ball command transmission means for transmitting a winning ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

  In a conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when the power is shut off due to some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before the power is shut off. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the cost increases because the function for backing up is required. According to the present embodiment, accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the dispensing control device 200 with a function for backing up.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to an external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can pay out the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Further, since the prize ball instruction counter capable of storing information on the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing the information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball having different transmission timings Information on signals can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and the prize areas (the first start prize port 36, the second start prize port 37, the third start prize port 42, and the general prize port 35) provided in the gaming area 32 The game control means (the game control device 100) which transmits a prize ball command based on the winning of the game ball to the special variation winning device 39), and the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command sent from the game control means The game control means is a status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control. Control to transmit the winning ball command to the payout control means based on the above, and when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, a status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control means As if In response to the status signal indicating that dispensing control can be started from the dispensing control means without continuously transmitting the winning ball command to the dispensing control means, the prize ball instruction corresponding to continuous output over a predetermined period. Is sent to the payout control means.

  Further, a plurality of winning areas (a first start winning opening 36, a second starting winning opening 37, a third starting winning opening 42, a general winning opening 35, a special fluctuation winning device 39) having different numbers of winning balls are provided in the game area 32. The game control means (game control apparatus 100) includes a prize ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of specifying presence / absence of non-transmission of a prize ball command for instructing payout control of gaming balls for each number of prize balls, When the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started and there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter, the winning ball command is transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200) The status signal indicates whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control prior to the identification of whether or not there is any unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter. It will be.

  In addition, game control is performed in an integrated manner, and to a predetermined winning area (first start winning opening 36, second starting winning opening 37, third starting winning opening 42, general winning opening 35, special variation winning device 39) Payout control means (disbursement control means (disbursement control) for controlling the disbursement of the game balls based on the game control means (the game control device 100) for transmitting the prize ball command based on the winning of the game balls and the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means Control device 200), and the game control means indicates that the status signal indicating whether or not the payout control means outputted from the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started A prize ball command transmitting means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command to the payout control means when playing, and information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the gaming ball to the predetermined winning area. Including award ball signal The external information output means (game control device 100) for outputting the prize ball signal) to the outside of the gaming machine, the external information output means being a state signal outputted from the payout control means, the payout control means being a payout control The output of the winning ball signal is performed regardless of whether or not it is possible to start.

  In addition, even if the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) generates a power failure and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicates that payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It will be transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the award ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing information on the award ball command and the information on the award ball signal (main award ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) has a predetermined winning area (a first start winning port 36, a second start winning port 37, a third start prize) The winning ball command is generated on the basis of one winning on the mouth 42, the general winning hole 35, and the special variation winning device 39), and one winning ball is generated when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The command is configured to be transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command counter (the game control device 100) can store the information of the winning in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area. And the prescribed entry The number of award ball commands not transmitted can be stored by updating the game ball in the area at the time of winning and making the update corresponding to the transmission to the award ball command to the payout control means, making it possible to store external information The output means accumulates the number of winning balls determined to be paid out according to the winning of the gaming ball in a predetermined winning area, and outputs a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number. The prize ball signal counter is capable of storing information on winnings in units of one winning in a predetermined winning area, updating at the time of winning of a gaming ball in a predetermined winning area, and outputting external information By performing updating in accordance with the cumulative processing of the number of winning balls by the means, it is possible to store the number of winning balls that have not been subjected to the cumulative processing.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 52 is a flowchart of the random number updating process 1. The random number update process 1 is executed in step A1306 of the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating the initial value (start value) of the big hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number which are targets of the initial value random number update processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A 1801).

  If the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 executes the processing of step A1804 and thereafter. On the other hand, if the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1801 is "Y"), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (A1802). Then, the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number loaded is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1803).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the hitting random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (A1804). If the random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is "N"), the processing after step A1807 is executed.

  On the other hand, when the random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1804 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 loads the initial value random number as the next initial value (A1805). Then, the next initial value of the loaded random number is set in the register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1806).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the winning symbol random number is waiting for setting the next initial value (start value) (A1807). When the hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1807 is "N"), the random number updating process 1 is ended.

  On the other hand, when the winning symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (the result of A1807 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 loads the default symbol random value as the initial value next time (A1808). The next initial value of the loaded symbol random number is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (A1809), and the random number updating process 1 is ended.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 53 is a flowchart of the random number update process 2. The random number update process 2 is executed in step A1307 of the timer interrupt process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2.

  In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random number 2) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as variation pattern random numbers, and both random number updating process 2 is targeted for updating. , Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, updating of 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) by random number updating process 2 executed in one interrupt process for the main process is performed for either upper 1 byte or lower 1 byte. Are configured to

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates a random number update scan counter for sequentially designating which of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process (A1901). Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (A1902). Then, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referred based on the calculated address (A1903). In the table referred to at this time, the upper limit judgment value for each kind of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made a round is stored.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 loads the value of the M1 counter to which a random value is set (A1904).

  Next, the game control device 100 acquires a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter, and masks the value of the M1 counter (A1905). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number. When the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter is updated. When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (A1906). When the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “Y”), the value left by masking the value of the M1 counter with the mask value of the upper 1 byte as the added value ( Hereinafter, this is set as a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to the “masked value”, the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (A1907), and the process shifts to the processing of step A1909.

  In addition, when the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (the result of A1906 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the upper 1 byte to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte The mask update value is set (A1908), and the process proceeds to step A1909. The reason why “1” is added to the masked value is that the masked value may be “0”, and “0” is added to avoid that the value does not change.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether the random number to be updated is a 2-byte random number (A1909). Then, if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is "Y"), the value (2 bytes) of the random number area to be updated is set (A1910), and the process proceeds to step A1912. On the other hand, if the random number to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1909 is “N”), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random value and the lower 1 byte of the random value is updated. A value (1 byte) is set (A1911), and the process goes to step A1912.

  Whether the game control apparatus 100 sets a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in the process of step A1907 or A1908 to the random number value as a new random number value, and the new random value is larger than the upper limit judgment value acquired in the process of A1903 It is determined whether or not it is (A1913).

  Then, when the new random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A1913 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the new random number to a lower random number area of 1 byte random number or 2 byte random number. Save (A1915). If the new random number is larger than the upper judgment value (the result of A1913 is “Y”), a value obtained by subtracting the upper judgment value from the new random value is taken as a new random value again (A1914). The random number value is saved in the lower random number area of 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (A1915).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the updated random number is a 2-byte random number (A1916). Then, if it is not a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is "N"), the random number update process 2 is ended. On the other hand, if it is a 2-byte random number (the result of A1916 is "Y"), a new random number value (when a new random number value is calculated again) is saved in the upper random number area of the 2-byte random number. (A1917), and the random number updating process 2 ends.

  As described above, the CPU 111a updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. Therefore, the CPU 111a displays the special view fluctuation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the inflow of gaming balls into the start area of the first start winning opening 36, the second start winning opening 37, and the third start winning opening 42. In order to determine the variation mode (variation pattern) of the above, the random number updating means is provided to update the variation pattern random number.

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 54 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The winning opening switch / status monitoring process is executed at step A1308 in the timer interrupt process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first prepares the winning opening monitor table 1 corresponding to one of the large winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) (A2001). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process is executed to monitor whether there is an illegal prize in the big prize port despite the fact that the big prize port is not open and to detect a normal prize (A2002). Details of the fraud & prize monitoring process will be described later.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the winning opening monitor table 2 corresponding to the other of the large winning opening switches 39a (two pieces) in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) (A2003). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process is executed to monitor the fraudulent prize and to detect a proper prize (A2004).

  Then, the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table corresponding to the starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal variation winning device 37 (A2005). Then, the fraud & prize monitoring process is executed to monitor a fraudulent prize and to detect a proper prize (A2006). Subsequently, a winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch which can always be paid is prepared (A2007). In the present embodiment, the winning opening switches that can always be paid are the winning opening switch 35a, the starting opening 1 switch 36a, and the starting opening 3 switch 42a. The winning opening switch that does not require fraud monitoring is the starting opening 1 switch 36a or the like.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a winning number counter update process for updating the winning number (A2008). Subsequently, a starting opening error monitoring process is performed to monitor a winning error of the starting winning opening (A2009). Then, the state scan counter is updated to specify in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state is to be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the current monitoring (A2010). The status scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3.

  Thereafter, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the monitoring state according to the value of the state scan counter (A2011). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether or not an error has occurred (A 2012). The details of the gaming machine state check process will be described later.

  By referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 1 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection etc. 1) monitoring is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of a state (shoot ball out error) based on a shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is 2, monitoring of the status (overflow error) based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is 3, the status based on the payout abnormal status signal (dispense error) Monitoring is set.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the monitoring state according to the value of the state scan counter (A2013). Then, a gaming machine state check process is executed to determine whether or not an error has occurred (A 2014).

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 2, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, monitoring of the status (glass frame open error) based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch Is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 1, monitoring of the state (body frame open error, front frame open error) based on the signal output from the front frame open detection switch is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is 2, monitoring of the state (frame radio wave improper) based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is 3, monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal Is set.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the state scan counter is 0 (A2015). Then, when the value of the error scan counter is not 0 (the result of A2015 is “N”), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next.

  In addition, when the value of the error scan counter is 0 (the result of A2015 is “Y”), the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 (A2016), and does an error occur, etc. The gaming machine state check process is executed to determine the state of (A 2017).

  By referencing the value of the status scan counter to the gaming machine status monitoring table 3, when the value of the status scan counter is 0, the status based on the abnormality detection signal 2 output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection etc. (switch abnormality 2) Monitoring is set up. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is 1 to 3.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 executes a payout busy signal check process to set a busy signal status (payout busy signal flag) based on the payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control apparatus 200 can start payout control (A2018) ), And finish the winning opening switch / status monitoring process. The details of the payout busy signal check process will be described later.

  Note that the processing from step A2016 to A2018 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is 0, so that it is executed at a rate of once for four timer interrupts. . That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processing from A2016 to A2018 is performed every 16 ms.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
FIG. 55 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fraud & prize monitoring process. The fraud & prize monitoring process is executed at steps A2002, A2004, and A2006 in the prize hole switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The fraud & prize monitoring process is a process performed on the special winning opening switch 39 a of the special variation winning device 39 and the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37 a) in the normal variation winning device 37. With regard to the second start winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) and the large winning opening (special fluctuation winning device 39), it is easy to be unfair to open the opening and closing member forcibly and insert the game ball and pay out the award ball. In addition to the detection of winning, monitor fraud.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring (A2101), and determines whether or not the fraud monitoring period is underway (A2102). For example, the fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special gaming state in which the special variation winning device 39 is opened when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the big winning hole switch 39a.

  Then, if it is in the fraud monitoring period (the result of A2102 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the target winning hole switch (A2103). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (result of A2103 is "N"), the target notification timer update information is loaded (A2112). Also, if there is an input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2103 is "Y"), the number of incorrect winnings of the target is updated by +1 (A2104), and the number of incorrect winnings after addition is determined to be a target for monitoring It is determined whether it is the number (for example, 5) or more (A2105).

  The reason why the judgment number is set to 5 is that, for example, when the big winning opening in the open state is converted to the closing state, the gaming ball is caught in the door member of the big winning opening, and the gaming ball passes the valid period of the count switch. Therefore, it is intended not to judge that the case of winning a prize or the case of noise on a signal is not wrong, and not to judge easily as an error although it is not wrong.

  Then, if the game control device 100 does not have the determined number or more (the result of A2105 is “N”), the game control device 100 prepares a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110). In addition, if it is more than the judgment number (the result of A2105 is “Y”), the number of wrong winnings is fixed to the number of wrong occurrence judging (A2106), the initial value (for example, 60000ms) is saved in the target wrong prize notification timer area. (A2107).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares the target injustice generation command as an effect command (A2108), and further prepares an incorrect prize occurrence flag as an injustice flag (A2109). Then, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

  On the other hand, when it is not the fraud monitoring period (result of A2102 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares the winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch (A2110), and sets the winning balls. The counter updating process is executed (A2111). Details of the winning number counter update process will be described later.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 loads the notification timer update information of the target (A2112), and determines whether or not the notification timer update is permitted (A2113). If updating of the notification timer is not permitted (the result of A2113 is "N"), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, when updating of the notification timer is permitted (the result of A2113 is “Y”), if the notification timer of interest is not 0, −1 is updated (A2114). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  The update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the normal variation winning device 37. In addition, the update of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is one big winning opening switch 39a, and allowed when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the other big winning opening switch 39a. I will not. As a result, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently as the informing of the special variation winning device 39, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (A2115), and if the value is not 0 (the result of A2115 is "N"), that is, if the time is not up. Ends the fraud & prize monitoring process. Also, if the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2115 is "Y"), that is, if the time is up or the time is already up, prepare the fraudulent release command of the object as a rendering command (A2116) Prepare an incorrect prize cancellation flag as an incorrect flag (A2117). Then, it is judged whether or not it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (A2118).

  If the value of the notification timer is 0 at the moment when the value of the notification timer is 0 (the result of A2118 is “Y”), that is, if the value of the notification timer is 0 in the present fraud & prize monitoring process. Clears the target number of incorrect prizes (A2119).

  In addition, if the game control apparatus 100 does not finish the process of step A2119 or the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (the result of A2118 is “N”), that is, the fraud & prize monitoring process before the previous time If the value of the notification timer becomes 0, the prepared fraud flag is compared with the value of the target fraud flag area (A2120).

  Then, when the prepared injustice flag matches the value of the injustice flag area of the target (the result of A2120 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 ends the injustice & prize monitoring process. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (the result of A2120 is "N"), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (A2121), and the rendering command setting is made. The process is executed (A2122). Thereafter, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended.

  By the above processing, an unauthorized occurrence command is sent to the effect control device 300 in response to the occurrence of the injustice, and an unauthorized termination command is sent to the effect control device 300 in response to the release of the injustice. The Rukoto.

[Winning number counter update processing]
FIG. 56 is a flowchart of the winning number counter updating process. The winning number counter updating process is executed in step A2111 of the fraud & prize monitoring process shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires the number of winning opening switches to be monitored from the winning opening monitoring table (A2201), and determines whether or not there is an input (accurately, a change in input) to the target winning opening switch. (A2202). If there is no input (the result of A2202 is "N"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211), and it is determined whether monitoring of all the switches is completed (A2212).

  On the other hand, when there is an input to the target winning opening switch (result of A2202 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 loads the value of the target number-of-winning counter area 1 (A2203), and the loaded value is +1 is updated (A2204). Furthermore, it is determined whether an overflow occurs according to the updated value (A2205).

  When no overflow occurs (the result of A2205 is “N”), the game control device 100 saves the updated value in the winning number counter area 1 (A2206). After completion of the process of step A2206, or when an overflow occurs (the result of A2205 is "Y"), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (A2207).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 updates the loaded value by +1 (A2208), and determines whether or not an overflow occurs according to the updated value (A2209). When the overflow does not occur (the result of A2209 is “N”), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (A2210). After completion of the process of step A2206, or when an overflow occurs (result of A2209 is "Y"), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (A2211). Then, it is determined whether the monitoring of all the switches has ended (A2212).

  If monitoring of all the switches has not ended (the result of A2212 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 returns to the process of step A2202 to determine whether or not there is an input on the target winning opening switch. Further, when the monitoring of all the switches is finished (the result of A2212 is “Y”), the winning number counter updating process is finished. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning on the winning area, and the information on the winning is stored.

[Starting mouth error monitoring process]
FIG. 57 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening error monitoring process. The winning number counter updating process is executed in step A2009 of the fraud & prize monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not there is a winning on the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A 2301). If there is no winning at the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2301 is "N"), it is determined whether there is a winning at the third starting winning opening 42 (starting opening 3) (A2307).

  When there is a winning on the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (the result of A 2301 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the previous winning is also the first starting winning opening 36. (A2302). If the previous winning combination is also the first starting winning opening 36 (the result of A2302 is “Y”), the number of consecutive winnings stored in the continuous winning number area in RWM is updated by +1 (A2303), and the number of consecutive winnings is upper limit It is determined whether it is a value (for example, 4) or more (A2304). If the number of consecutive winnings is equal to or more than the upper limit (the result of A2304 is "Y"), the processing after step A2313 is executed. If the number of consecutive winnings is less than the upper limit (the result of A2304 is "N"), it is determined whether or not there is a winning on the third start winning opening 42 (starting opening 3) (A2307).

  On the other hand, when the previous winning combination is not the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2302 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 saves 1 in the continuous winning number area in RWM (A2305), and starts in RWM. In the mouth determination data area, save the starting opening 1 winning combination information indicating that there is a winning to the first starting winning opening 36 (A2306), and determine whether there is a winning in the third starting winning opening 42 (A2307 ).

  When there is no winning on the third start winning opening 42 (starting opening 3) (result of A2307 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes processing of step A2318 and subsequent steps. If the third start winning opening 42 has a prize (the result of A2307 is "Y"), it is determined whether the previous winning is also the third starting prize opening 42 (A2308).

  If the previous winning is also the third starting winning opening 42 (the result of A2308 is “Y”), the number of consecutive winnings stored in the continuous winning number area in RWM is updated by 1 (increased by 1) (A2309) Then, it is determined whether the number of consecutive winnings is equal to or more than the upper limit (for example, 4) (A 2310). If the number of consecutive winnings is less than the upper limit (the result of A2310 is “N”), the processing of step A2318 and subsequent steps is executed. If the previous winning is not the third starting winning opening 42 (result of A2308 is "N"), save 1 in the continuous winning number area in RWM (A2311), in the starting opening judgment data area in RWM, the third The starting opening 3 winning combination information indicating that there is a winning on the starting winning opening 42 is saved (A2312), and the processing after step A2318 is executed.

  When the number of consecutive winnings is equal to or more than the upper limit (the result of A2304 or A2310 is “Y”), the game control device 100 keeps the number of consecutive winnings at the upper limit (A2313), and sets the initial value in the starting opening error notification timer area For example, save 60 seconds) (A2314), save an error occurring flag in the start opening error flag area in RWM (A2315), prepare a start opening error occurrence command as a rendering command (A2316), and set rendering command setting processing Is executed (A2317), and the start opening error monitoring process is ended. The effect control device 300 that has received the start opening error occurrence command executes notification (warning) of the error occurrence using the display device 41 or the like. The details of the rendering command setting process will be described later.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the starting opening error notification timer is 0 as a process after A2318 (A2318). When the starting opening error notification timer is 0 (the result of A2318 is “Y”), the starting opening error monitoring process is ended. If the starting opening error notification timer is not 0 (the result of A2318 is "N"), the starting opening error notification timer is updated by -1 (decreased by 1) (A2319), and the starting opening error notification timer is 0 again It is determined whether or not (A2320). If the start opening error notification timer is 0 (the result of A2320 is “Y”), save the middle normal flag in the start opening error flag area in RWM (A 2321), and prepare the start opening error cancellation command as a rendering command. (A2322) The rendering command setting process is executed (A2323), and the starting opening error monitoring process is ended. The effect control device 300 that has received the start opening error cancellation command stops the notification (warning) of the error occurrence.

  The prize switching mechanism 105 of the start prize opening unit 101 operates to cause the game balls to alternately win the first start prize opening 36 (starting opening 1) and the third starting prize opening 42 (starting opening 3), If the same starting winning combination is won in succession, there is a possibility of failure of the prize switching mechanism 105 or an unfair winning due to a thread fishing ball or the like. Therefore, a failure in the prize switching mechanism 105 or an unfair prize is checked by the start opening error monitoring process. When the number of consecutive winnings to the same starting winning opening among the first starting winning opening 36 and the third starting winning opening 42 reaches the upper limit value (for example, 4) (when winning in the same starting winning opening for 4 consecutive times), effect control The device 300 reports the occurrence of an error. In a period corresponding to the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the starting opening error notification timer, the effect control device 300 can perform notification (warning) of the occurrence of an error. As described above, the game control device 100 constitutes a starting opening error monitoring means, and the effect control device 300 constitutes a starting opening error notifying means.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
FIG. 58 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the gaming machine state check process. The gaming machine state check processing is executed at steps A2012, A2014 and A2017 in the winning opening switch / state monitoring processing shown in FIG.

  First, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter (A2401). The status scan counter is set to a value in the range of 0 to 3 corresponding to the gaming status. The relationship between the state monitoring table and the state scan counter is as described in the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the signal to be checked is on (A2402). If the signal to be checked is not on (result of A2402 is "N"), that is, if the signal to be checked is off, prepare the state off flag as the state flag (A2403), and obtain the target state off command And prepare (A2404). Further, the target state off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2405). The state off flag indicates a normal state with respect to an error-based signal, and indicates a no touch state with respect to a touch switch signal.

  On the other hand, when the signal to be checked is on (result of A2402 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares a state on flag as a state flag (A2406), acquires the state on command of the object, and prepares. (A2407). Furthermore, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (A2408). The state on flag indicates an abnormal or incorrect state with respect to an error-based signal, and indicates a touch-on state with respect to a touch switch signal.

  When the process of step A2405 or step A2408 ends, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the acquired signal (A2409). If they match (the result of A2409 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2412. If they do not match (the result of A2409 is "N"), the acquired signal state is saved in the target signal control area (A2410), and the target state monitoring timer is cleared (A2411).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 updates the target state monitoring timer by +1 (A2412). Further, it is determined whether or not the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (A2413). If the value of the updated state monitoring timer is less than the corresponding timer comparison value (the result of A 2413 is “N”), the gaming machine state check process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the updated state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the corresponding timer comparison value (result of A2413 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 updates the state monitoring timer by -1, and the timer comparison value- Stay at the value of 1 (A2414). Further, it is determined whether the prepared status flag matches the value of the target status flag area (A2415). If they match (the result of A 2415 is “Y”), the gaming machine state check processing is ended.

  On the other hand, when the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (the result of A 2415 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 saves the prepared state flag in the target state flag area. (A2416). Finally, an effect command setting process for setting an effect command is executed (A2417), and the gaming machine state check process is ended. The rendering command here is either a state off command or a state on command. If the state on command is an error system command, the effect control device 300 is made to start an error notification.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
FIG. 59 is a flow chart showing a procedure of payout busy signal check processing. The payout busy signal check process is executed in step A 2018 of the winning opening switch / state monitoring process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether a payout busy signal input from the payout control apparatus 200 is on (A 2501). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 can not start the payout control.

  When the payout busy signal is not on (result of A2501 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares an idle state flag as a determination status (A2502), and sets an off determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec). (A2503). On the other hand, when the payout busy signal is on (result of A2501 is "Y"), a busy status flag is prepared as a determination status (A2504), and an on determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 msec) is set (A2505) ).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state (on / off) of the current payout busy signal (A2506). If they match (the result of A2506 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A2509. If they do not match (the result of A2506 is "N"), the state of the current payout busy signal is saved in the busy signal state area (A2507), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0 (A2508).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by +1 (A2509), and determines whether the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (A2510). If the monitoring timer is less than the timer comparison value (the result of A 2510 is “N”), the payout busy signal check process is ended.

  If the monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the timer comparison value (the result of A 2510 is “Y”), the game control device 100 updates the busy signal monitoring timer by −1 and keeps the value smaller than the timer comparison value by 1 (A 2511) The prepared status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (busy signal status area) (A 2512), and the payout busy signal check process is ended.

  The payout busy signal check process sets a payout busy signal flag (busy signal status) based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal flag is not immediately changed, and the busy signal flag is changed when the state which has changed over the timer comparison value continues. It is hard to be influenced by

  In addition, since the busy signal flag is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal flag is not set and is in an undefined state until one of the signal states continues over the timer comparison value. As a result, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout control device 200 immediately outputs the winning ball command even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. And the payout ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (A1309) in the above-mentioned timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 60 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure game process. In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, and the start opening 3 switch 42a, the control of the entire processing related to the special view variation display game, and the display of the special view are performed.

  The game control apparatus 100 first executes start opening switch monitoring processing for monitoring winning of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, and the start opening 3 switch 42a (A2601). In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when the game ball wins in the first starting winning opening 36, the second variation starting winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, and the third starting winning opening 42, various random numbers (big hit random numbers etc.) are extracted The game result pre-determination is performed to determine in advance the game result based on the winning at a stage before the start of the special view variation display game based on the winning. The details of the starting opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the gaming control device 100 executes a special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602). In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, the detection of the gaming ball with the count switch 39a provided in the special variation winning device 39 is monitored. The details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, if the special-purpose game processing timer is not 0, the game control device 100 updates −1 (subtracts 1) (A 2603). The special view game processing timer is clocked by an interruption period (4 msec) of the timer interrupt processing by -1 updating. In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to zero. Next, it is determined whether the special figure game processing timer is 0 (A2604). When the special figure game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A2604 is “N”), it moves to the processing of step A2615.

  The game control device 100 corresponds to the special figure game process number when the special figure game process timer is 0 (the result of A2604 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or has already been up. A special figure game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to processing is set in a register (A2605). Further, the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the special figure game sequence branch table (A2606). Subsequently, a subroutine call according to the special figure game process number is made, and the game branching process according to the special figure game process number is executed (A2607).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of fluctuation of the special view fluctuation display game, and sets the start of fluctuation of the special view fluctuation display game, setting of the effect, Special figure normal processing is executed to set information required to perform special figure variation processing (A2608). The details of the special view ordinary processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is “1” at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the stop display time of the special view, sets the information necessary for performing the special view display process, etc. The process during the figure fluctuation is executed (A2609). In addition, the details of the special figure in-change process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number of the game control number 100 is “2” in step A2607, if the game result of the special view fluctuation display game is a big hit, the game control apparatus 100 sets the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, and each big hit The special figure display process is executed to set the fan fare time in accordance with the special winning opening pattern, and to set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process (A2610). The details of the special view display process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "3" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets the opening time of the special winning opening, updates the number of times of opening, and the information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process. The fanfare / interval processing for setting etc. is executed (A2611). The details of the fanfare / during-interval process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is “4” at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets an interval command if the big hit round is not the final round, and sets an ending command if the big round is the final round, A special winning opening open processing is performed to set information required to perform the special winning opening residual ball processing (A2612). The details of the special winning opening open process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  If the game processing number is "5" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 sets a time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged if the big hit round is the final round, A big winning opening remaining ball process is performed to set information required to perform the big hit end process (A2613). The details of the special winning opening residual ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "6" at step A2607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a big hit end process for setting information necessary for executing the special view routine process (A2614). The details of the big hit end processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the processing based on the special view game processing number is finished, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares a special view 1 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special view 1 display 51 (A2615), and then the special view 1 display The symbol variation control process according to 51 is executed (A2616). And after preparing the special figure 2 fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (A2617), the symbol fluctuation control processing concerning the special figure 2 display 52 is executed (A2618). The details of the symbol variation control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (A2601) in the special view game process will be described. FIG. 61 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the starting opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first prepares a prize monitoring table for the first starting winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A 2701), executes hard random number acquisition processing (A 2702), and wins prize for the first starting winning opening 36 It is determined whether or not there is (A2703). If there is no winning on the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "N"), the processing after step A2709 is executed. On the other hand, when there is a winning on the first start winning opening 36 (the result of A2703 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during the general public support state) (A2704).

  When it is determined that the special control time is not in the middle (in the power transmission support state) (the result of A2704 is “N”), the game control device 100 executes the processing of step A2707 and thereafter. On the other hand, if it is in the special view time short (during general power support state) (result of A2704 is "Y"), a right-handed instruction notification command is prepared as a rendering command (A2705), and rendering command setting processing is executed ( A2706).

  That is, in the case of the universal power support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed. . In the case of the present embodiment, the first starting winning opening 36 does not win unless it is left hitting, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 does not win unless it is right hitting. In addition, the game ball does not pass through the common view start gate 34 unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the general power support state (time saving state), right-handed driving is more advantageous than left-handed driving, but there is a win in the first start winning opening 36 during the general power-on support state (ie, general power support In the case of being left-handed in the state), the right-handed instruction informing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing the right-handed operation by the display device 41 or the like. .

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the first start winning opening 36 (starting opening 1) (A2707), and executes the special view start port switch common process (A2708). Then, a prize monitoring table for the second starting winning opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (A2709), hard random number acquisition processing is executed (A2710), and whether or not there is a winning for the second starting winning opening It is determined (A2711). If there is no winning on the second start winning combination (the result of A2711 is "N"), the processing of step A2716 and subsequent steps is executed.

  On the other hand, when there is a winning on the second start winning opening (result of A2711 is "Y"), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the normal electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is in operation. That is, it is determined whether or not the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is activated to be in an open state where winning of the gaming ball is possible (A2712). If the ordinary motor-operated combination is in operation (the result of A2712 is "Y"), the process shifts to the processing of step A2714.

  On the other hand, when the ordinary motorized role is not in operation (the result of A2712 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether the common electric charge is in progress (A2713). If the number of incorrect winnings on the normal variation winning device 37 is equal to or greater than the number of fraud occurrence determinations (for example, 5), it is determined that the general electric power is in the process of being created. In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the game ball is in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a game ball which has won in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of incorrect prizes. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

  After the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information of suspension by the second start winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) when the common electric power fraud is not occurring (result of A2713 is "N") (A2714) The special view starting opening switch common processing is executed (A2715), and the processing after step A2716 is executed. Also, if it is determined at A2713 that a common electric program is in progress (the result at A2713 is “Y”), the processing after step A2716 is executed. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated further.

  The game control apparatus 100 prepares a prize monitoring table for the third start winning opening 42 (starting opening 3) (A2716), executes hard random number acquisition processing (A2717), and the third starting winning opening 42 (starting opening 3) It is determined whether or not there is a prize winning (A2718). If there is no winning on the third starting winning opening 42 (the result of A2718 is "N"), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. On the other hand, when there is a winning on the third start winning opening 42 (the result of A2718 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not the special figure time short (during the general public support state) (A2719).

  When it is determined that the special control time is not in the middle of the special view time (during general pressure support state) (the result of A2719 is "N"), the game control device 100 executes the processing after step A2722. On the other hand, when it is in the special figure time short (in the general-purpose support state) (the result of A2719 is "Y"), the right-handed command notification command is prepared as a rendering command (A2720), and rendering command setting processing is executed ( A2721).

  That is, in the case of the universal power support state (time saving state), regardless of the probability state (high probability state / low probability state) of the variable display game, the right-handed instruction notification command is prepared and the effect command setting process is executed. . In the case of the present embodiment, the third starting winning opening 42 does not win unless it is left hitting, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 does not win unless it is right hitting. In addition, the game ball does not pass through the common view start gate 34 unless it is right-handed. Therefore, in the case of the universal power support state (time saving state), right-handed is more advantageous than left-handed, but there is a prize in the third start winning opening 42 during the general-purpose power support state (ie In the case of being left-handed in the state), the right-handed instruction informing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device 300 executes a notification (warning) instructing the right-handed operation by the display device 41 or the like. .

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a table for setting information on hold by the third start winning opening 42 (starting opening 3) (A2722), and executes the special view starting opening switch common processing (A2723), End the start port switch monitoring process.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (A2702, A2710, A2717) in the starting opening switch monitoring process will be described. FIG. 62 is a flowchart of the hard random number acquisition process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets start-up-no-win-win-out information indicating that there is no winning on the start winning hole (A2801). Next, it is determined whether or not there is an input on the target switch (A2802), and when there is no input on the target switch (the result of A2802 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. The target switch is the start port 1 switch 36a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2702, and the start port 2 switch 37a in the hard random number acquisition process of step A2710. In the hard random number acquisition process of step A2717, it is the starting opening 3 switch 42a.

  If there is an input to the target switch (result of A2802 is "Y"), the gaming control apparatus 100 reads the random number latch register status (the state of the random number latch register), and whether or not there is latch data in the target random number latch register It is determined (A2803, A2804). If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is “N”), the hard random number acquisition processing is ended.

  If there is latch data in the target random number latch register (the result of A2804 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 loads and prepares the jackpot random number extracted in the target hard random number latch register (A2805) Information is set on a starting opening winning combination indicating that there is a winning on the mouth (A2806). In addition, the prepared big hit random number is used by special figure starting opening switch common processing.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common processing (A2708, A2715, A2723) in the starting port switch monitoring processing will be described. FIG. 63 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view starting opening switch common process. The special view starting port switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting port 1 switch 36a, the starting port 2 switch 37a, and the starting port 3 switch 42a.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first manages information on the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a, and the starting opening 3 switch 42a outside the gaming machine 10 The start opening signal output number which is the number of times output to the device is loaded (A 2901), the loaded value is updated by +1 (A 2902), and it is determined whether the output number overflows (A 2903). If the number of outputs does not overflow (result of A2903 is "N"), the updated value is saved in the RWM start opening signal output number area (A2904), and the process shifts to processing of step A2905. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (the result of A2903 is “Y”), the process of step A2905 is performed. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 selects the number of to-be-updated special views corresponding to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a, the starting opening 2 switch 37a and the starting opening 3 switch 42a (the number of starting memories). Is less than the upper limit value (A2905). If the number of to-be-updated special views is not less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is “N”), the special view starting port switch common processing is ended. In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special views is less than the upper limit (the result of A2905 is "Y"), the number of to-be-updated special views (to-special number 1 or special number 2) is updated by 1 (A2906).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a decoration special drawing reserve number command (decorative special figure 1 reserve number command or ornament special figure 1 reserve number command) corresponding to the start port switch to be monitored and the special figure reserve number as a rendering command. Then (A2907), rendering command setting processing is executed (A2908). Subsequently, the target starting opening winning flag is saved (A2909).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 calculates the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special drawing reservations (A2910), and stores the big hit random number prepared in step A2805 as the big hit random number of RWM. Save to the area (A2911). Next, the jackpot symbol random number of the starting port switch to be monitored is extracted and prepared (A2912), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of RWM (A2913).

  Then, the game control device 100 saves the variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (A2914). Next, the address of the fluctuation order flag storage area corresponding to the sum of the special drawing 1 reservation number and the special drawing 2 reservation number is calculated in RWM (A2915), and the target fluctuation order flag is stored in the calculated fluctuation order flag storage area. Save (A2916). As a result, the address of the storage area corresponding to any one of suspension (for example, suspension 1 to 8) is calculated, and the variation order flag indicating the variation (variation display game) of Special Figure 1 or Special Figure 2 is saved. Subsequently, the special figure holding information determination process is executed (A2917), and the special figure starting port switch common process is ended.

  Here, the game control device 100 (RAM 111c) extracts a predetermined random number based on the inflow of gaming balls into the start winning area of the first start winning opening 36, the third start winning opening 42, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The start-up storage means is configured to store a predetermined number as an upper limit as a start-up memory serving as an execution right of the variable display game. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) sets various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as the first start storage with the predetermined number as the upper limit. It stores and stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the second start winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) or the third starting winning opening 42 as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit .

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view holding information determination process (A2917) in the starting opening switch common process will be described. FIG. 64 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special map hold information determination process. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetching (pre-judging) process that determines the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

  The game control apparatus 100 first prepares a low probability judgment flag indicating that the judgment is low probability (A 3001), and the big hit depends on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit judgment value (low probability judgment value) In step A3002, a preread big hit determination process is performed to determine whether the read operation is performed. Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the pre-read big hit determination process is a big hit (A3003). If the determination result is a big hit (the result of A3003 is "Y"), set the big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch (A3004), stop corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2912 The symbol information is acquired (A3005), and the process proceeds to step A3007. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3003 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (A3006), and the process proceeds to step A3007.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol information in the symbol information area in the RWM (A3007). Subsequently, a prefetch stop symbol command (low probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and the stop symbol information is prepared as a rendering command (A3008), and rendering command setting processing is executed (A3009). The pre-reading stop symbol command (low probability) indicates stop symbol information and the like determined by the low probability determination value.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 prepares a high probability determination flag indicating that the determination is high probability (A3010), and whether or not the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value (high probability determination value) Pre-reading big hit judgment processing which decides whether it is big hit is executed (A3011). Then, it is determined whether or not the determination result of the pre-read big hit determination process is a big hit (A3012). If the judgment result is a big hit (the result of A3012 is "Y"), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch (A3013) and stop corresponding to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A2912. The symbol information is acquired (A3014), and the process proceeds to step A3016. On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (the result of A3012 is "N"), the stop symbol information of the outset is set (A3015), and the process proceeds to step A3016.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the occurrence probability of the big hit is a high probability state (a probability change state, a special figure high probability is in progress) (A3016). If it is in the high probability state (the result of A3016 is "Y"), the stop symbol information is saved in the symbol information area in the RWM (A3017), and the process proceeds to step A3018. If the state is not the high probability state (the result of A3016 is “N”), the process of step A3017 is not performed, and the process directly proceeds to the process of step A3018.

  As described above, in the high probability state, the stop symbol information determined by the high probability determination value is overwritten in the symbol information area and is finally saved. On the other hand, when it is not in the high probability state (in the low probability state), the stop symbol information (A3007) determined by the low probability determination value is finally saved in the symbol information area. The stop symbol information finally saved in the symbol information area is used in the look-ahead (A3020, A3021) of the variation pattern.

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 prepares as a rendering command a prefetch stop symbol command (high probability) corresponding to the target starting opening switch and the stop symbol information (A3018), and executes a rendering command setting process (A3019). The pre-reading stop symbol command (high probability) indicates stop symbol information and the like determined by the high probability determination value. Next, a special figure information setting process for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is executed (A3020), and a variation pattern setting process for setting a variation mode of the special figure variation display game is executed (A A3021). The special figure information setting process in step A3020 and the variation pattern setting process in step A3021 are the same as the process executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the variation start process in the special figure routine processing described later.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a look-ahead change pattern command corresponding to the change pattern number as an effect command (A3022), executes an effect command setting process (A3023), and ends the special view hold information determination process. .

  With the above process, the prefetch stop pattern command including the result of the special view change display game based on the start storage of the preread target and the read change pattern command including the information of the change pattern in the special view change display game based on the start storage It is prepared and transmitted to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as start storage in the start storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start storage (for example, whether or not a special result is obtained) Etc.) make a pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

  Furthermore, in the above processing, both the prefetching judgment result determined as a big hit with the low probability judgment value and the prefetching judgment result determined as a big hit with the high probability judgment value are a prefetch stop symbol command (low probability) and a prefetch stop symbol command respectively. It is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as (high probability). Thereby, even if the probability state of the big hit changes after the transmission of the pre-reading stop symbol command, the effect control device 300 can execute the pre-reading notice (such as hold change notice) corresponding to the probability state before and after the change.

[Pre-reading big hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the pre-read big hit determination process (A3002, A3011) in the special view suspension information determination process will be described. FIG. 65 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the pre-read big hit determination process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value (A3101), and judges whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (A3102). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3102 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets out (other than the jackpot) as the judgment result (A3107), and the read ahead jackpot judgment processing finish.

  Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3102 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 judges whether the judgment flag is the high probability judgment flag (A3103). Then, if the determination flag is the high probability determination flag (the result of A3103 is “Y”), the upper limit determination value during the high probability is set (A3104). On the other hand, when the determination flag is not the high probability determination flag (when the result is A3103 is “N”), the upper limit determination value in the low probability is set (A3105).

  After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A3106). If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3106 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3107). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3106 is "N"), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A3108). When the determination result is set, the pre-read big hit determination process is ended.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (A2602) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 66 is a flowchart of the special winning opening switch monitoring process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening is being processed (A3201). When the special winning opening open processing is being performed (the result of A3201 is “Y”), the processing shifts to the processing of step A3203. If the special winning opening is not being processed (the result of A3201 is "N"), the value of the special figure game processing number is "5", that is, whether or not the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress. It is determined (A3202).

  When the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (the result of A3202 is “Y”), the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A3203. Also, when the special winning opening residual ball processing is not in progress (the result of A3202 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes 0, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether or not there is an input to the special winning opening switch 39a (A3203). When there is no input on the special winning opening switch (the result of A3203 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the special winning opening switch has an input (the result of A3204 is "Y"), the special winning opening count command is prepared as a rendering command (A3204), and a rendering command setting process (A3205) is executed.

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 determines whether the value of the special figure game processing number is “4”, that is, whether or not the special winning opening is being processed (A3106). If the special winning opening is not being processed (the result of A3106 is "N"), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. When the special winning opening is being processed (the result of A3106 is “Y”), the special winning opening count is updated by +1.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the special winning opening count number is equal to or more than the upper limit value (the number of gaming balls that can be won in one round, for example, "9") (A3208). When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (the result of A3208 is “N”), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening count is equal to or more than the upper limit (the result of A3208 is "Y"), the special figure game processing timer area is cleared to 0 (A3209), and the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, the details of the special figure normal process (A2608) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 67 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special view ordinary processing.

  First, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the special drawing 1 holding number and the special drawing 2 holding number are both 0 (A 3301). When the special figure 1 reservation number and the special figure 2 reservation number are both 0 (the result of A3301 is "Y"), it shifts to processing of step A3310. When at least one of the special figure 1 reserve number and the special figure 2 reserve number is not 0 (the result of A3301 is “N”), the fluctuation order corresponding to the reserve (reserve 1) (oldest reserve) to be digested first The variation order flag is loaded from the flag storage area (for the total number of reservations 1) (A3302).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the fluctuation order flag indicates the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (special figure 1 fluctuation display game) (A3303). When the change order flag indicates the change of the special figure 1 (the result of A3303 is "Y"), prepare the decoration special figure reserve number command corresponding to the special figure 1 reserve number as an effect command (A3304), The command setting process is executed (A3305). The decoration special drawing reservation number command includes information on a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the special drawing 1 holding number at the current time (the special drawing 1 holding number after the special figure 1 variation display game is to be started). Then, the special figure 1 fluctuation start process for starting the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is executed (A3306), and the special figure normal process is ended.

  In addition, when the fluctuation order flag does not indicate the fluctuation of the special figure 1 (the result of A3303 is “N”), that is, when it indicates the fluctuation of the special figure 2, the gaming control device 100 holds the special figure 2 A decoration special drawing reservation number command corresponding to the number is prepared as a rendering command (A3307), and rendering command setting processing is executed (A3308). This decoration special drawing reservation number command includes information on a value obtained by subtracting 1 from the special drawing 2 reservation number at the current time (the special drawing 1 reservation number after the special figure 2 variation display game is to be started). Then, the special figure 2 variation start process for starting the special figure 2 variation display game is executed (A3309), and the special figure routine process is ended.

  If both the special drawing 1 holding number and the special drawing 2 holding number are 0 (the result of A3301 is “Y”), the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether or not the customer waiting demo has been started (A3310) . If the customer waiting demo has been started (the result of A3310 is “Y”), the process proceeds to step A3314. If the customer waiting demo has not been started (the result of A3310 is "N"), the customer waiting demonstration flag is set in the customer waiting demo flag area (A3311), and the customer waiting demo command is prepared as a presentation command (A3312). The command setting process is executed (A3213). The presentation control device 300 that has received the customer waiting demo command executes the customer waiting demonstration on the display device 41 or the like.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 sets "0" related to the special view routine process as the process number (A3314), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3315). Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A3316), the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag region in the RWM (A3317), and the special view routine processing is ended.

  In this manner, the variation order flag is loaded from the variation order flag storage area (for the total number of reservations 1) corresponding to the reserve (pending 1) to be consumed first, and the variation display game of the type indicated by the variation order flag (Special figure 1 fluctuation display game or special figure 2 fluctuation display game) is started. That is, the variable display game is to be executed in the order of occurrence of the winnings (starting memory), and the suspension is taken from the old ones in the winning order.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (A3306) in the special view normal process will be described. FIG. 68 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the special view 1 change start process. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game.

  The game control device 100 saves a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3401). Subsequently, the big hit flag 1 setting processing for setting the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is a big hit is executed (A3402). Details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 1 stop symbol setting process related to setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information) (A3403). The details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process will be described later. Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 executes a special figure information setting process of setting special figure information that is a parameter for setting a variation pattern (A3404). Details of the special view information setting process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 1 fluctuation display game is set (A3405 ). After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process of setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the special view 1 fluctuation display game (A3406). Details of the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described later.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 executes a fluctuation start information setting process of setting information on the fluctuation start of the special view 1 fluctuation display game (A3407), and ends the special view 1 fluctuation start process. Details of the change start information setting process will be described later.

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 sets "1" related to the special figure variation process as the process number (A3408), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3409).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3410), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special view 1 in the test signal output data area (A3411). After that, save the in-fluctuation flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (A3412), and start the blink control timer (special figure 1 indicator 51 blink period timer) initial value (for example, special figure 1 blink control timer area) 100 ms) is set (A 3413). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 1 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 1 variation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (A3309) in the special figure normal process will be described. FIG. 69 is a flowchart of the special view 2 change start process. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, and the process similar to the process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. It is something to do.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves a special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) in the fluctuation symbol discrimination flag area (A3501). Subsequently, the big hit flag 2 setting processing for setting the shift information and the big hit information to the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the special figure 2 variation display game is a big hit is executed (A3502).

  Next, the game control device 100 executes a special figure 2 stop symbol setting process according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information) (A 3503). Further, special drawing information setting processing for setting special drawing information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is executed (A3504). Subsequently, a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table, which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the special figure 2 fluctuation display game, is prepared (A3505).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 executes a fluctuation pattern setting process of setting a fluctuation pattern of the special view 2 fluctuation display game (A3506). And the fluctuation start information setting processing which sets the information of fluctuation start of the special figure 2 fluctuation indication game is executed (A3507).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 first sets "1" related to the special figure variation process as the process number (A3508), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A3509).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 clears the customer waiting demo flag area (A3510), and saves a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A3511). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (A 3512), and in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area, an initial value (for example, a timer of the blinking cycle of the special figure 2 display 52) 100 ms) is set (A 3513). Subsequently, an initial value (for example, 0) is saved in the special figure 2 variation symbol number area (A3414), and the special figure 2 variation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
Next, details of the jackpot flag 1 setting process (A3402) in the special view 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 70 is a flowchart of the procedure of the jackpot flag 1 setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves shift information in the big hit flag 1 area (A 3601). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1), prepared (A 3602), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3603). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit (A3604).

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3604) is a big hit (result of A3605 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 1 area where the outlier information is saved in step A3601. Save (A3606), and end the jackpot flag 1 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3604) is not a big hit (the result of A3605 is "N"), the big hit flag 1 setting process is ended while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special view 1 variable display game is either "big hit" or "losing".

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
Next, details of the big hit flag 2 setting process (A3502) in the special view 2 change start process will be described. FIG. 71 is a flowchart of the procedure of the jackpot flag 2 setting process. In this processing, processing similar to the processing in the big hit flag 1 setting processing shown in FIG. 70 is performed for the second start storage.

  First, the gaming control apparatus 100 saves shift information in the jackpot flag 2 area (A3701). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) of RWM and prepared (A 3702), the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (A3703). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a big hit determination process is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit (A3704).

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is a big hit (the result of A3705 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 overwrites the big hit information in the big hit flag 2 area where the outlier information is saved in step A3701. Save (A3706), and end the big hit flag 2 setting process. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (A3704) is not a big hit (the result of A3705 is "N"), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended while the big hit flag 2 is saved. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the special view 2 variable display game is either “big hit” or “losing”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
Next, the details of the big hit determination process (A 3604, A 3704) in the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process will be described. FIG. 72 is a flowchart of the procedure of the jackpot determination process. The big hit determination process is a process common to the big hit determination process in other processes executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value (A3801), and judges whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (A3802). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

  If the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A3802 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets out (other than the jackpot) as the judgment result (A3807) and ends the jackpot judgment processing Do.

  Further, when the value of the big hit random number is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A3802 is “N”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not the big hit occurrence probability is a high probability state (probability state). (A3803). Then, in the case of the high probability state (the result of A3803 is “Y”), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (A3804). On the other hand, if it is not in the high probability state (the result of A3803 is “N”), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (A3805).

  After setting the upper limit judgment value of the value of the big hit random number, the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (A3806). If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is "Y"), a deviation (other than the big hit) is set as the judgment result (A3807). On the other hand, when the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A3806 is "N"), the big hit is set as the judgment result (A3808). When the determination result is set, the big hit determination process is ended.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (A3403) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 73 is a flow chart showing a procedure of special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (A4001). If it is a big hit (the result of A4001 is "Y"), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) ) From the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (A4002). Next, a special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (A4003). Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4004). This process selects the type of special result (the type of big hit).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table (A4005), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4006). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4007). In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of rounds is 16R or 6R.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
The data is saved in the probability variation determination data area (A4008). The probability fluctuation determination data may include information on the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the big hit state, and the general public support state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit state. In this embodiment, there are low probability data (usually without power support), high probability data 1 (with probability change and power support), and high probability data 2 (with latency probability change and without power support) as the probability fluctuation determination data. After that, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4011).

  On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4001 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (A4009), the disconnection stop symbol pattern Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4010), and an ornament special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4011). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4012), and a rendering command setting process is executed (A4013). The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4014), clear 0 of the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4015), and stop the special figure 1 symbol End the setting process.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (A 3503) in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 74 is a flow chart showing a procedure of special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4101). If it is a big hit (the result of A4101 is "Y"), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for 1 pending) ) From the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (A4102). Next, special figure 2 big hit design table is set (A4103). Subsequently, the stop symbol number corresponding to the big hit symbol random number loaded is acquired and saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A4104). This process selects the type of special result (the type of big hit).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets a special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table (A4105), acquires a stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number, and saves it in the stop symbol pattern area (A4106). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (A4107). In the present embodiment, the upper limit number of rounds is 16R or 6R.

Next, the game control device 100 acquires probability fluctuation determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number,
The data is saved in the probability variation determination data area (A4108). The probability fluctuation determination data may include information on the probability state (high probability / low probability) after the end of the big hit state, and the general public support state (time saving state) after the end of the big hit state. For example, as the probability fluctuation determination data, there are low probability data (usually without power support), high probability data 1 (with probability change and power support), and high probability data 2 (with latency probability change and without power support). Thereafter, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4111).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (the result of A 4101 is “N”), the gaming control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection in special figure 2 stop symbol number area (A 4109) and the disconnection stop symbol pattern Is saved in the stop symbol pattern area (A4110), and an ornament special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (A4111). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (A4112), and an effect command setting process is executed (A4113). The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, save the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A4114), clear 0 of the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for the number of reservations 1) (A4115), and stop the special figure 2 symbol End the setting process.

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the details of the special figure information setting process (A3404, A3504) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 75 is a flow chart showing a procedure of special drawing information setting processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a variation group selection pointer table (A4201), and acquires a variation group selection pointer corresponding to the probability state and the stop symbol pattern number (number indicating the stop symbol pattern) (A4202). For example, the probability states include probability state 1 (normally, no power support), probability state 2 (probable change, presence of power support), and probability state 3 (latent probability change, no power support). The probability state here includes presence / absence of power support (general power support state / non-general power support state) in addition to probability variation / normal (high probability state / low probability state). Moreover, in this embodiment, the stop symbol pattern number is the number 0 (displaced symbol), the number 1 (16R positive variation big hit symbol), the number 2 (6R positive variation big hit symbol A), the number 3 (6R positive variation big hit symbol B), There are number 4 (6R positive variation big hit symbol C) and number 5 (6R normal big hit symbol).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether the stop symbol pattern is an out symbol (A4203). If the stop symbol pattern is a lost symbol (the result of A4203 is "Y"), the variation group selection pointer is updated to a value corresponding to the total value of the special figure 1 reserve number and the special figure 2 reserve number (A4204), step It transfers to the process of A4205. Here, in the case of not being in the general-purpose-support state, the variation group selection pointer is set to change the distribution of variation patterns every 1, 2 to 3, 4 to 5, 6 to 8 in the total number of holding. In addition, in the case of the general power support state, the variation group selection pointer is set to change the distribution of variation patterns for every 1, 2, 3, 4 to 8 of the total number of reservations.

  On the other hand, if the stop symbol pattern is not the disappointing symbol (the result of A4203 is "N"), that is, if it is the big hit symbol, the game control apparatus 100 proceeds to the processing of step A4205 without performing the processing of step A4204. That is, in the case of the jackpot symbol, the variation group selection pointer is set at step A4202 without being influenced by the special figure 1 holding number or the special figure 2 holding number.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the change group selection pointer in the change group selection pointer area (A4205), and ends the special view information setting process.

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation pattern setting process (A3406, A3506) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 76 is a flow chart showing a procedure of fluctuation pattern setting processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a variation group selection address table (A4301), acquires the address of the variation group table corresponding to the variation group selection pointer, and prepares (A4302). Further, the variation pattern random number 1 is loaded from the variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) and prepared (A4303). Then, 2-byte distribution processing is executed (A4304), and the address of the variation pattern selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (A4305).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 loads and prepares a random number from the variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1) of the target (special figure 1 or special figure 2) (A4306). Then, distribution processing is executed (A4307), and the fluctuation pattern number obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and saved in the fluctuation pattern number area (A4308). As described above, the game control apparatus 100 functions as a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from among a plurality.

[2-byte distribution process]
Next, details of the 2-byte distribution process (A4304) in the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 77 is a flowchart of the 2-byte assignment process. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting a variation pattern selection table of the special figure variation display game from the variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks whether the top data of the selection table (the variation group table prepared in A4302) is a code without allocation (ie, "0") (A4401). Here, the fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one fluctuation pattern selection table, but the fluctuation group table defines only the fluctuation pattern selection table in which the fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. (For example, in the case of a partial change group table in the case where the result is a loss), there is no need to distribute, so a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

  Then, when the first data of the selection table (the change group table) is a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 updates the address of the data corresponding to the distribution result. Then (A4407), the 2-byte distribution process is ended. On the other hand, if the first data in the selection table (variation group table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4402 is "N"), one distribution value defined first in the selection table (variation group table) Acquire (A4403).

  Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4403 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A4303 (A4404), and the calculated new random number value Is smaller than "0" (A4405). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4405 is “N”), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4406), the process proceeds to step A4403 and Perform the following processing. That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (variation group table) is acquired (A4403), and thereafter, the distribution value is subtracted from the random number value determined in the previous step A4405, and a new random number value is obtained. Is calculated (A4404), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number is smaller than "0" (A4405).

  The above process is executed until it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"). Thereby, any one fluctuation selection table is selected from at least one fluctuation selection table defined in the selection table (variation group table). Then, if it is determined in step A4405 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4405 is "Y"), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (A4407), and 2 bytes End the distribution process.

[Distribution process]
Next, details of the distribution process (A4307) in the fluctuation pattern setting process will be described. FIG. 78 is a flowchart of the distribution process. The distribution process is a process for selecting a variation pattern of the special figure variation display game from the variation pattern selection table based on the variation pattern random number 2.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks whether the data at the top of the target selection table (the variation pattern selection table prepared at step A4305) is a non-allocation code (that is, "0") (A4501). Here, the variation pattern selection table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one variation pattern (variation pattern number), but in the case of a selection table that does not require distribution, the distribution value “0”, That is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

  Then, when the first data of the target selection table (the variation pattern selection table) is the code without distribution (the result of A4502 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets the address of the data corresponding to the allocated result. After updating (A4507), the distribution process ends. On the other hand, when the first data of the target selection table (the variation pattern selection table) is not a code without distribution (the result of A4502 is "N"), the target selection table (the variation pattern selection table) is defined first. The first allocation value is acquired (A4503).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 calculates a new random number value by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A4503 from the random number value (value of the variation pattern random number 2) prepared in step A4306 (A4504). It is determined whether the calculated new random number is smaller than "0" (A4505). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (the result of A4505 is “N”), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (A4506), the process proceeds to step A4503 and Perform the following processing.

  That is, the distribution value defined next in the target selection table (variation pattern selection table) is acquired (A4503), and then the distribution value is newly subtracted by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value determined in the previous step A4505. A random number value is calculated (A4504), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (A4505). The above process is executed until it is determined in step A4505 that the new random value is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"). Thereby, at least one variation pattern (variation pattern number) defined in the target selection table (variation pattern selection table) is selected.

  When the game control device 100 determines in step A4505 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (the result of A4505 is "Y"), the address is updated to the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result. (A4507), the distribution process ends.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (A3407, A3507) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process will be described. FIG. 79 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the fluctuation start information setting process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first clears the random number storage area of the target variation pattern random numbers 1 and 2 (A4601). Next, a fluctuation time value table is set (A4602), fluctuation time values corresponding to fluctuation pattern numbers are acquired (A4603), and saved in the special figure game processing timer area. Thereafter, the variation command (MODE, ACTION) corresponding to the variation pattern number is prepared as a rendering command (A4604), and rendering command setting processing is performed (A4605).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the number of special drawing reservations corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag by -1 (A4606), and sets the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (A4607). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (A4608), and the free space after the shift is cleared (A4609).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 shifts the fluctuation order flag storage area (A4610), clears the free space after the shift (A4611), and ends the fluctuation start information setting process.

  Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  Then, the information on the start of the special view variation display game is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later, and the effect control device 300 responds to the determined variation pattern based on the reception of the information on the start of the special view variation display game. The detailed effect contents in the special figure variation display game are set. As information related to the start of these special view variation display games, an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on stop symbols, variation of the special view variation display game A variation command including information on a pattern is mentioned, and the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (A2609) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 80 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special figure changing process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first uses a symbol stop command (special figure 1 symbol stop command or special figure 2 symbol stop command) corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag) as a rendering command. Preparation is made (A4701), and rendering command setting processing is executed (A4702). The effect control device 300 having received the symbol stop command stops the corresponding decoration special figure variation display game (the decoration special figure 1 variation display game or the decoration special figure 2 variation display game).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern number indicating the stop symbol pattern (A 4703), and saves the set display time in the special-purpose game processing timer area (A 4704). In the case of the present embodiment, 800 msec is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is a detached symbol pattern, and 2000 msec is set as the display time when the stop symbol pattern is a big hit symbol pattern.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets a process number "2" related to the special figure display process (A4705), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A4706).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 in the test signal output data area (A4707), and further saves the signal regarding the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 in the test signal output data area (A4707) A4708).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 sets a control timer initial value (for example, 256 msec) to a symbol determination frequency signal control timer area used when outputting a symbol determination frequency signal relating to the execution frequency of the special view variation display game to the external information terminal. Save (A4709).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 controls the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop at the special view 1 display 51 as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51. Save (A4710). Furthermore, as information for controlling the special view 2 change display game in the special view 2 display 52, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 2 display 52 is saved in the special view 2 change control flag area (A4711) , Special processing during process transition setting processing ends.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special figure display process (A2610) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 81 is a flow chart showing a procedure of processing during special view display.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first sets the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 change start process, and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 change start process. And are loaded (A4801), and the RWM big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area are cleared (A 4802).

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether the loaded big hit flag 2 is a big hit (A4803), and if it is a big hit (the result of A4803 is “Y”), the big hit of the second special view fluctuation display game Test signal related to the start of (special figure 2 big hit) (for example, signal ON during condition device operation, signal ON during continuous operation device operation, signal ON for special symbol 2) in test signal output data area of RWM Save (A4810) and set the round number upper limit table (A4811).

  On the other hand, if the result of the check of the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (result of A4803 is "N"), the gaming control apparatus 100 determines whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit or not (A 4804), If there is a case (result of A4804 is "Y"), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is on, the feature continuous operation device operating) regarding the start of the big hit of the first special view fluctuation display game The signal is turned on and the special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (A4805), and processing for setting the round number upper limit table is executed (A4811).

  When the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (the result of A4804 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 sets "0" related to the special processing routine processing as the processing number (A4806), and performs processing in the special processing game processing number area The number is saved (A4807), and the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (A4808). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A4809), and the special view display processing is ended.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 acquires the round number upper limit value (16 or 6 in the case of the present embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit value information, and saves it in the RWM round number upper limit value area (A4812). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (A4813).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 loads the decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepares it as an effect command (A4814), and executes an effect command setting process (A4815) ). After that, a probability information command relating to information in which the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game is made the normal probability state (low probability state) is prepared as a rendering command (A4816), The setting process is executed (A4817). Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the round number upper limit is prepared as an effect command (A4818), and effect command setting processing is executed (A4819).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the big hit fanfare time (for example, 10000 msec) in the special figure game processing timer area (A4820). Then, the special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (A 4821), and the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (A 4822). Thereafter, the fanfare / interval process shift setting process 1 is executed (A 4823), and the special figure display process is ended. That is, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special fluctuation winning device 39 into the open state based on the result being a special result in any of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game. It is a special game state generating means that generates a state.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1 (A 4823) in the special processing display processing will be described. FIG. 82 is a flowchart of the fan transfer / interval processing transition setting process 1.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets "3" which is a processing number relating to fanfare / interval processing (A5501), and saves the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5502).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 outputs a signal relating to the start of a big hit (special game state) (for example, 1 big hit signal, 2 big hit signals, 3 big hit signals, 4 big hit signals) external information output Save to data area (A5503), signal about termination of high probability state and short time state (for example, turn off special symbol 1 high probability state signal, turn off special symbol 2 high probability state signal, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (A5504). In addition, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal electric combination 1 open extension state signal are always off. After that, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (A5505), and the display state LED (for example, the second gaming state display unit 58) in time saving is turned off. A number without time saving is saved in the area (A5506), and a common drawing low probability flag is saved in the common drawing game mode flag area in the RWM (A5507).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 clears the variable symbol determination flag area (A5508), and turns off the game state display LED (third game state display unit) 59 provided on the game board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. The high probability notification flag area is cleared (A5509), and the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area in the RWM (A5510). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area in the RWM that saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power recovery (A5511). Thus, the high probability state and the short time state (general power support state) are ended.

  After that, save a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is on) relating to a right-handed command in the test signal output data area (A5512) and turn on the display LED (for example, first gaming state display unit 57) during right-handed In order to cause the game state display number 2 area to save the number in the right-handed state (A5513), the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, details of the fanfare / in-interval process (A2611) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 83 is a flow chart showing a procedure of fanfare / during interval processing.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first updates the number of rounds in the special gaming state by +1 (A5701), prepares a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state (big hit state) as an effect command (A5702), and effects command The setting process (A5703) is performed.

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the special winning opening open time (for example, 29 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (A5704), and sets the processing number to "4" for the special winning opening opening process ( A5705), Save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (A5706). After that, save the signal related to the opening start of the special winning opening (for example, the signal during special electric combination 1 operation is on) in the test signal output data area (A5707) and store the number of winnings to the special winning opening Clear the information in the mouth count area (A5708). Then, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (A5709), and the fanfare / interval processing ends.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, details of the special winning opening open process (A2612) in the special view game process will be described. FIG. 84 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special winning opening open process of this embodiment.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the special gaming state being executed with the number of rounds upper limit value of the RWM upper limit number area A5901). Then, when it is not the final round (the result of A5901 is "N"), an interval command relating to the interval between the rounds is prepared as a rendering command (A5902), and rendering command setting processing is executed (A5904).

  When it is the final round (the result of A5901 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 prepares the ending command concerning display control of the ending display screen etc. at the time of the end of the special game state as an effect command (A5903) , Effect command setting processing is executed (A5904).

  Thereafter, the processing number is set to "5" related to the special winning opening residual ball processing (A5905), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A5906). Save the remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special view game processing timer area (A5907), and then save the off data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 39b in the special winning opening solenoid output data area ( A5908), the special winning opening open processing ends.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (A2613) in the special figure game processing will be described. FIG. 85 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the special winning opening residual ball processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether the current round is the final round by comparing the current number of rounds in the special gaming state being executed with the number of rounds upper limit value of the RWM upper limit number area A6101).

  Then, when the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (the result of A6101 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 sets "3" which is a processing number related to the fanfare / in-interval processing (A6102) The processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (A6103). Then, the interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A6104).

  Next, the game control device 100 saves a signal (for example, the special electric combination 1 operating signal is turned off) in the test signal output data area (A 6105) regarding the open end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39). , Finish the big winning opening remaining ball processing.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (the result of A6101 is "Y"), "6" is set as the processing number related to the big hit end processing (A6106), and the processing number is the special drawing game processing Save to the number area (A6107). Then, the ending time (for example, 5.1 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (A6108).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves a signal (for example, the special electric combination 1 operating signal is turned off) regarding the open end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 39) in the test signal output data area (A6109). Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (A6110), clear the information on the round number area storing the round number of the special gaming state (A6111), The information on the number-of-rounds upper limit area storing the upper limit of the number of rounds in the special gaming state is cleared (A6112), and the special winning opening residual ball processing is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end process (A2614) in the special figure game process will be described. FIG. 86 is a flowchart of the procedure of the big hit end process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first executes a subroutine call based on the probability variation determination data saved in the probability variation determination data area at step A4008 (A6401). If the probability fluctuation determination data is low probability data (normally, no power support), the big hit end setting process 1 is executed (A6402). If the probability variation determination data is high probability data 1 (certain variation, presence of charge support), big hit end setting processing 2 is executed (A6403). When the probability fluctuation determination data is high probability data 2 (latency probability change, no power support), a big hit end setting process 3 is executed (A6404).

  Next, the gaming control device 100 loads the probability information command from the power failure recovery transmission command area, prepares it as a rendering command (A6405), and executes rendering command setting processing (A6406).

  Thereafter, the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as a process number relating to the special figure normal process (A6407), and saves the process number in the special figure game process number area (A6408). Then, save the signal regarding the end of the big hit (for example, 1 signal for big hit, 3 signals for big hit, 4 signal for big hit off) in the external information output data area (A6409), and the signal for big hit end (for example, Condition device operating signal OFF, character continuous operating device operating signal OFF, special symbol 1 signal OFF, special symbol 2 signal OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (A6410). Then, the probability fluctuation determination flag area is cleared (A6411).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 clears the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of the big hit (A6412), and saves the flag during the fraud monitoring period in the big winning opening fraud monitoring period flag region (A6413 ), End the big hit end processing.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 1 (A 6402) in the big hit end process will be described. FIG. 87 is a flowchart of the procedure of the big hit end setting process 1.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves a signal (no big hit 2 signal off) in the external information output data area for time saving no (A 6501), a signal relating to the start of low probability & time saving no (special symbol 1 high probability status signal OFF, special symbol 2 high probability state signal OFF, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal OFF, normal symbol 1 high probability state signal OFF) Test signal output data area Save to (A6502).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the number without time saving in the game state display number area in order to turn off the display LED (for example, the second game state display unit 58) during time saving (A6503). The general drawing low probability flag is saved in the general drawing game mode flag area (A6504), and the special drawing low probability & time saving none flag is stored in the special drawing game mode flag area in the RWM (A6505). Then, save a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is off) relating to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (A6506) and turn off the display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) during the right hitting In order to make it play, the game state display number 2 area saves the number in the left hitting state (A 6507), and saves the probability information command (low probability) in the power failure recovery transmission command area in the RWM (A 6508).

[Big hit end setting process 2]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 2 (A 6403) in the big hit end process will be described. FIG. 88 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the big hit end setting process 2.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves the signal (big hit 2 signal on) regarding the start of the short time in the external information output data area (A6601), the signal regarding the start of high probability & short time (special symbol 1 high probability status signal ON, special symbol 2 high probability status signal ON, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening status signal ON, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening status signal ON, normal symbol 1 high probability status signal ON) test signal output data Save to the area (A6602).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the number with time reduction in the game state display number area in order to light up the display LED (for example, the second game state display unit 58) in time reduction (A6603), and The general drawing high probability flag is saved in the general drawing game mode flag area (A6604), and the special drawing high probability & time short flag is saved in the special drawing game mode flag area in the RWM (A6605). Then, the probability information command (high probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area in the RWM which saves the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of the power failure recovery (A6606). In addition, although it is right hitting during the short hours, since it is hitting from the middle of a big hit, the setting about right hitting is not performed.

[Big hit end setting processing 3]
Next, details of the big hit end setting process 3 (A6404) in the big hit end process will be described. FIG. 89 is a flowchart of the procedure of the big hit end setting process 3.

  The game control apparatus 100 first saves a signal (no big hit 2 signal off) in the external information output data area for time saving none (A6701), a signal regarding the start of high probability & time saving no (special symbol 1 high probability status signal ON, special symbol 2 high probability status signal on, special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening status signal off, special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening status signal off, normal symbol 1 high probability status signal off) test signal output data area Save to (A6702).

  In order to turn off the display LED (for example, the second game state display unit 58) during time saving, the game control apparatus 100 saves the number with no time reduction in the game state display number area (A6703), and the common drawing game mode flag area The general drawing low probability flag is saved in (A 6704), and the special drawing high probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special drawing game mode flag area (A 6705). Then, save the signal (for example, the launch position designation signal 1 is off) relating to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (A6706), and turn off the display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) during the right hitting In order to cause the game state display number 2 area to save the number in the left hitting state (A 6707), the power failure recovery transmission command area saves the probability information command (latency) (A 6708).

[Processing command setting process]
FIG. 90 is a flowchart showing a procedure of effect command setting processing for setting an effect command to be transmitted to the effect control device 300. The effect command setting process is a process common to the effect command setting process (A2417, A2706, A2721, A2908, etc.) executed during the timer interrupt process.

  The game control apparatus 100 first reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A7001). Furthermore, it is determined whether the transmission buffer is full (A7002).

  When the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A7002 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes command data (MODE (upper byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7003).

  If the transmission buffer is full (the result of A7002 is “Y”), the game control device 100 returns to the process of step A7001.

  Furthermore, the game control apparatus 100 reads the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (A7004), and determines whether the transmission buffer is full (A7005). If the transmission buffer is full (the result of A7005 is "Y"), the process returns to the process of step A7004.

  In addition, when the transmission buffer is not full (the result of A7005 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 writes the command data (ACTION (lower byte)) to the serial transmission buffer (A7006), and then sets the rendering command. End the process.

  As described above, by transmitting the effect command to the effect control device 300 by serial communication, the burden on the game control device 100 can be reduced, and analysis of the effect command can be made difficult. In addition, the timing of command transmission can be advanced, and the number of data lines can be reduced. Furthermore, in the effect control device 300 as well, it is not necessary to capture a command in the strobe, and the burden can be reduced.

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 91 shows symbol variation control processing (A2616, A2618) in the special drawing game processing described above, and symbol variation control processing in the common drawing game processing described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol (the first special figure, the second special figure, etc.) or the normal symbol (the common figure) and setting the display data of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol.

  The game control apparatus 100 first checks whether or not the fluctuation control flag pertaining to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special drawing, the second special drawing, and the common drawing) is fluctuating (A7501). In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A2615, step A2617, step A7614 The address for stop) and the address for display table 1 (for variation) are defined.

  The game control apparatus 100 acquires a symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled (A 7503) when the variation flag according to the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating (the result of A7502 is "Y"). ). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A2615, step A2617, and step A7614.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the blink control timer to be controlled by -1 (A 7504), determines whether the blink control timer after the update is 0 (A 7505), and the blink control timer after the update When it is not 0 (the result of A7505 is "N"), the display data which corresponds to the value of the fluctuation design number territory of control object is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A 7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  If the blinking control timer after updating is 0 (the result of A7505 is "Y"), the blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target blinking timer area is saved (A7506), and the fluctuation symbol number of the control object Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (A7507), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7508). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A 7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the fluctuation flag concerning the symbol to be controlled is not changing (result of A7502 is "N"), the game control device 100 acquires the symbol display table (for stop) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled. (A 7509). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A2615, step A2617, and step A7614. Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (A7510), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (A7511), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  As the blinking control timer initial value saved in step A7506, the value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed is saved. Here, a value corresponding to 100 msec is defined as the blinking control timer initial value. The blinking control timer initial value is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the fluctuation time.

  Further, the corresponding range in step A7507 is defined by the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variation symbol number reaches the upper limit value by updating the variation symbol number by +1 in step A7507, the variation symbol number is set to 0, and the variation symbol number is 0 to 0 (variation symbol number upper limit judgment value -1 It is updated sequentially in the range of). In steps A7508 and A7511, display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the variation symbol number is set to be acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the variation symbol number upper limit judgment value. Will be repeatedly displayed.

  By defining the blinking control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed as described above, the interval and the display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are round The number of updates to be made can be set for each game.

[Puppet game processing]
Next, the details of the regular game processing (A1310) in the timer interrupt processing will be described. FIG. 92 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the common drawing game process. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a, control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of common drawing, and the like are performed.

  The game control device 100 first executes gate switch monitoring processing for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a (A7601). The details of the gate switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 executes a general prize winning switch monitoring process of monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a (A7602). The details of the Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process will be described later.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the −1 by subtracting 1 by subtracting 1 from the common game processing timer (A7603). Note that the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the common-play game processing timer has become 0 (A7604).

  If the value of the common-play game processing timer is 0 (the result of A7604 is “Y”), that is, if the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 A common drawing game sequence branch table to be referred to for branching to the corresponding processing is set in the register (A7605).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 acquires a branch destination address of the process corresponding to the common drawing game processing number based on the set common drawing game sequence branch table (A7606). Then, a subroutine call according to the common drawing game processing number is made, and a game branching process corresponding to the common drawing game processing number is executed (A7607).

  When the game processing number is “0” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 monitors the start of change of the common view change display game, and sets the start of change of the common view change display game and sets the effect, The common drawing routine processing for setting the information necessary for performing the common drawing fluctuation processing is executed (A7608). Details of the ordinary drawing processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game processing number is “1” in step A 7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes a general-diagram changing processing that performs setting of information necessary for performing the general-diagram display processing ((1) A7609). The details of the general drawing variation processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "2" at step A7607, if the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit, the game control apparatus 100 performs the common power according to whether or not the time saving state is in progress. The general drawing display processing is executed to set the open time, set the information necessary for performing the common processing per processing (A 7610). Details of the processing during the display of the common drawing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  When the game processing number is "3" at step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 generally continues processing during a general drawing, or performs setting of information necessary for performing a general electric residual ball processing, etc. The process is executed during each drawing (A7611). Details of the in-progress process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, when the game processing number is “4” in step A 7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes generalization residual ball processing to set information necessary for performing end processing per common drawing (A 7612) ). Details of the common drawing residual ball processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  In addition, when the game processing number is “5” in step A7607, the game control apparatus 100 executes the end processing per common drawing, which performs setting of information necessary for performing the common processing (A7608). (A7613). Details of the end processing per common drawing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 prepares a common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing indicator 53 (A7614). Thereafter, the symbol variation control process related to the control of the variation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display 53 is executed (A7615), and the common drawing game process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value of the common-play game processing timer is not 0 (the result of A7604 is "N"), that is, if the time is not up, the game control apparatus 100 executes the processing of step A7614 and subsequent steps.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
FIG. 93 is a flowchart of the gate switch monitoring process. The gate switch monitoring process is executed in step A7601 in the common-play game process shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first determines whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (A7701). Then, if there is an input on the gate switch 34a (the result of A7701 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not it is a game state in which the player strikes the right (A7702). The game state to hit right is the big hit state, time saving state (general power support state). If it is in the gaming state in which the player strikes the right (the result of A7702 is "Y"), the process shifts to the processing of step A7705. If the game state is not right-handed (the result of A7702 is "N"), a left-handed command notification command (left-handed command) is prepared as an effect command (A7703), and effect command setting processing is executed (A7704). The effect control device 300 that has received the left-handed command notification command executes, using the display device 41 or the like, a notification (warning) instructing to hit the left.

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 acquires the common drawing reservation number and determines whether the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, 4) (A 7705). When the common drawing reserve number is less than the upper limit (the result of A 7705 is “Y”), the gaming control apparatus 100 updates the common drawing reserve number by +1 (A 7706), and corresponds to the updated common drawing reserve number. The address of the random number storage area is calculated (A7707). The random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (A7708), and the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the hit symbol random number storage area (A7709), and the gate switch monitoring process is ended.

  On the other hand, if there is no input to the gate switch 34a (result of A7701 is "N"), or if it is determined that the number of general drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (the result of A7705 is " N "), end the gate switch monitoring process.

[Puden prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the routine power winning switch monitoring process (A7602) in the routine game processing will be described. FIG. 94 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the routine power winning switch monitoring process.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether or not the regular drawing is in a hit state, that is, whether the regular drawing change display game is in a hit state and the normal change winning device 37 is executing a predetermined number of opening operations. (A7801). Then, if it is in the middle of the drawing (if the result of A7801 is "Y"), it is determined whether or not there is an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (A7802). If there is an input to the start port 2 switch 37a (the result of A7802 is "Y"), the count number of the common charge counter is updated by +1 (A7803).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the updated count value of the common charge counter has reached the upper limit (for example, 6) (A 7804). Then, when the count number reaches the upper limit value (the result of A7804 is “Y”), the hit end pointer value (for example, 4 or 7) is loaded from the end pointer area per common drawing in RWM and Is saved in the control pointer area (A 7805).

  Finally, the general drawing game processing timer is cleared (A 7806), and the general electric winning switch monitor processing ends. In other words, if there is a general prize winning above the upper limit in the hit state of the common drawing, then hit the common processing control pointer area per common drawing at that point and save the end value, and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 closes. It is made for the hit state of the common drawing to be finished halfway.

  On the other hand, when it is determined that the game control apparatus 100 is not in the region of a drawing (the result of A7801 is "N"), it is determined that the start opening 2 switch 37a is not input (the result of A7802 is "N") Or, if it is determined that the count number has not reached the upper limit (the result of A7804 is “N”), the routine power prize switch monitoring process is ended.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (A 7608) in the common drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 95 is a flow chart showing a procedure of common processing.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether the number of lay figures held is 0 (A7901). If the general drawing reservation number is not 0 (the result of A7901 is “N”), the random number is loaded from the RWM random drawing storage area per common drawing (for the number of holdings 1), and the RWM common drawing random number storage area per common drawing A hit symbol random number is loaded from (for holding number 1), and a random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common drawing after loading and a symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) per common drawing are cleared to 0 (A7902 ). Furthermore, whether or not the probability that the hit result will be hit in the common drawing variation display game is during the common drawing high probability (high probability state) higher than normal, ie, it is a short time state (general power support state) It is determined (A7903). Note that the probability per spread in the high probability is 250/251, and the probability per spread in the low probability is 0/251.

  When the game control apparatus 100 is not in the common drawing high probability (the result of A7903 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 sets a low probability lower limit judgment value (here, 251) which is the lower judgment value in the common drawing low probability (A7904) If the standard drawing high probability is in progress (the result of A7903 is “Y”), a high probability lower limit judgment value (1 in this case) which is a lower judgment value in the general drawing high probability is set (A7905). Transfer to processing.

  The game control device 100 determines whether or not the hit random number is equal to or more than the upper limit determination value (here, 251) (A7906). Note that the upper limit judgment value here is common to the medium and low probability. If the hit random number is equal to or more than the upper limit judgment value (the result of A7906 is "Y"), that is, if it is a loss, the process moves to the processing of step A7908. If the per-random number is less than the upper limit determination value (the result of A7906 is "N"), it is determined whether the per-random number is less than the lower limit determination value (A7907).

  If the hit random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (the result of A 7907 is “Y”), that is, if the hit random number is out, the game control apparatus 100 saves the shift information in the hit flag area (A 7908). Further, the out-of-order stop symbol number is set as the common view stop symbol number (A7909), the out-of-shape symbol information is saved in the common view stop symbol information area (A7910), and the process proceeds to step A7914.

  If the random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (result of A7907 is "N"), that is, in the case of a hit, the game control device 100 saves the hit information in the hit flag area (A7911) and loads the hit symbol random number. The corresponding hit stop symbol number is set (A7912), the hit stop symbol information corresponding to the hit stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (A7913), and the process proceeds to step A7914. In addition, there may be several types of hit stop symbols, and there are two in the present embodiment.

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 saves the stop symbol number in the common drawing stop symbol area (A7914), saves the stop symbol number in the test signal output data area (A7915), shifts the random number storage area per common drawing (A7916) After clearing the empty area after shift to 0 (A7917), the number of general drawing reservations is updated by -1 (A7918).

  That is, when the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 is executed, the rankings of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by common drawing reservation number 1 or later are advanced one by one. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to the number 3 for general drawing reservation It will be done. Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.

  Next, the game control device 100 extracts the variation pattern random number 3 (A7919), sets a variation time corresponding to the variation pattern random number 3, and saves it in the common game processing timer area (A7920). For example, the fluctuation time is distributed to 500 msec with probability 200/256, 1500 msec with probability 40/256, and 3000 msec with probability 16/256. Then, the processing shift setting processing during the general drawing variation is executed (A7921), and the general drawing normal processing is ended. In addition, the processing shift setting processing during the general drawing fluctuation will be described later.

  In addition, when the number of block diagrams reserved number is 0 (the result of A7901 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as a process number for shifting to the general diagram process (A7922) The processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (A7923). Thereafter, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (A7924), and the routine drawing routine processing is ended.

[Processing setting setting process during general drawing fluctuation]
FIG. 96 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the process shift setting process during the common drawing fluctuation. The processing shift setting processing during a general drawing variation is executed at step A7921 in the common drawing routine processing shown in FIG.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets “1” as a processing number for shifting to processing during general drawing fluctuation (A8101), and saves the processing number in the general drawing game processing number area (A8102).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves a signal (normally, the symbol 1 is on during the normal state) signal on the start of the common drawing variation display game in the test signal output data area (A 8103), and the common drawing variation display game is changing. The flag during fluctuation indicating that is stored in the common drawing fluctuation control flag area (A8104). Then, save the blinking control timer initial value (for example, 100 msec) which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the common drawing indicator in the common drawing blinking control timer area (A8105), and set the initial value in the common drawing fluctuation symbol number area (here Then save 0) (A8106). After that, the processing transition setting processing during the general drawing fluctuation ends.

[During processing of common map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general drawing fluctuation processing (A7609) in the common drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 97 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the general drawing variation processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets the processing number to “2” as a setting process for shifting to the processing during the general drawing display (A8301), and saves the processing number in the common drawing game processing number area (A8302). After that, the game control apparatus 100 saves the common drawing display time (for example, 0.6 seconds) which is the display time of the common drawing fluctuation display game result in the common drawing indicator in the common drawing game processing timer area (A8303) .

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal (normally, the signal during the symbol 1 fluctuation is turned off) regarding the end of fluctuation of the common drawing in the test signal output data area (A8304). Then, a stop flag indicating that the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the common drawing fluctuation control flag area (A8305), and the common drawing fluctuation middle process is ended.

[Process while displaying a common map]
Next, the details of the common drawing display processing (A7610) in the common drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 98 is a flow chart showing a procedure of processing during display of a common drawing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first loads a hit flag (hit information or out information) set in the ordinary drawing routine processing (A8401), and clears the RWM hit flag area (A8402). Then, it is determined whether the hit information is set in the loaded hit flag (A8403).

  When the hit information is set to the hit flag (result of A8403 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 sets the in-hit processing setting table (A8404), and the hit corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information The start pointer value (in this case, 0 or 5) is obtained and saved in the control pointer area during the common drawing (A 8405). Also, the hit end pointer value (4 or 7 in this case) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the common drawing hit end pointer area (A8406). Next, the CPU 10 acquires a common use open time (for example, 1700 msec or 2600 msec) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information, and saves it in the common drawing game processing timer area (A 8407). By the above processing, the mode of opening the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time state is set, and for example, the opening can be made three or two times.

  Subsequently, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets "3" as a processing number for shifting to processing during a common drawing hit (A8408), and saves the processing number in the common drawing game processing number area (A8409). After that, save the signal related to the hit of the common drawing fluctuation display game (Normal signal is on during 1 per symbol) and the signal related to the start of the common power operation (Normal signal is on during the operation of electric character 1) in the test signal output data area. (A8410). Furthermore, in order to output a signal for driving (turning on) the common solenoid, on data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (A8411).

  Furthermore, the game control device 100 clears the information of the common charge count number area storing the winning number to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (A 8412), and the winning number to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the regular monitoring period. Clear the information on the area for the number of prize winning prize winning prizes to be stored (A8413). Finally, a flag defining the fraud monitoring period of the normal change winning a prize apparatus 37 is saved in the general transmission fraud monitoring period flag area (A8414).

  When the hit information is not set in the hit flag (the result of A8403 is “N”), the game control apparatus 100 sets “0” as a process number for shifting to the common processing routine (A8415). The processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (A8416). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (A 8417), and the processing during the routine drawing display is ended.

[Every time per popular map]
Next, the details of the common drawing in-game processing (A7611) in the common drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 99 is a flow chart showing the procedure of per-diagram processing.

  The gaming control apparatus 100 first loads and prepares the control pointer during the normal drawing per shot (A8601), and the value of the control pointer during the common drawing per window is the value of the control pointer upper limit value area during the general drawing (A8602).

  Then, if the value of the control pointer during the common drawing does not reach the value of the control pointer upper limit area during the common drawing (the result of A8602 is “N”), the gaming control device 100 performs the control during the common drawing. The pointer is updated by +1 (A8603). Further, the routine operation shift setting process is executed (A8604), and the routine is ended during the routine. In addition, the details of the routine operation shift setting process will be described later.

  In addition, if the value of the control pointer during the common drawing reaches the value of the control pointer upper limit area during the common drawing (the value of the end of the hit) (the result of A8602 is “Y”) The general operation shift setting process is executed (A8604) without executing the process of updating (+1) the middle processing control pointer area in step A8603 and the middle processing in the common drawing end.

[Puppet operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the general-purpose power transition setting process (A8604) in the middle-round process will be described. FIG. 100 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the routine operation transition setting process. The routine operation shift setting process is a process of controlling the drive of the routine power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer.

  The game control device 100 first branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (A8701). Here, as the control pointer, the value before updating in step A8603 is used. If the value of the control pointer is 0, 2, or 5, the process proceeds to step A8702, and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer is controlled in order to control the closing of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The wait time (for example, 300 msec) after the closing is saved in the common game processing timer area (A8702).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 sets the off data in the common power solenoid output data area to turn off the common power solenoid 37c (A8703), and ends the common power operation transition setting process.

  Further, when the value of the control pointer is either 1 or 3, the game control device 100 corresponds to the control pointer in order to shift to the processing of step A8704 and control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The normal power game open time (for example, 1700 msec) which is the open time of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is saved in the normal game processing timer area (A8704). Further, in order to turn on the common voltage solenoid 37c, ON data is set in the common voltage solenoid output data area (A8705), and the common power operation transition setting process is ended.

  Further, when the value of the control pointer is 6, the game control device 100 shifts to the processing of step A 8706 and controls the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so the normal fluctuation winning device corresponding to the control pointer The general-purpose game open time (for example, 2600 msec), which is the open time of 37, is saved in the common-play game processing timer area (A 8706). Further, in order to turn on the common voltage solenoid 37c, ON data is set in the common voltage solenoid output data area (A8707), and the common power operation transition setting process is ended.

  Furthermore, when the value of the control pointer is either 4 or 7, the game control device 100 proceeds to step A8708 to end the release control of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and process the general charge residual ball ( In order to execute A7612), "4" is set as the process number (A8708), and the process number is saved in the common drawing game process number area (A8709).

  Subsequently, the game control device 100 saves the routine charge residual ball processing time (for example, 600 msec) in the regular game processing timer area (A8710). Thereafter, the off data is saved in the power solenoid output data area in order to set the power solenoid 37c to off (A8711), and the power shift operation setting process is ended.

[Puden residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the general game residual ball processing (A7612) in the common drawing game processing will be described. FIG. 101 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the routine charge residual ball processing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a processing number “5” related to the end processing per common drawing (A8901), and saves the processing number in the common drawing game processing number area (A8902). After that, the common drawing ending time (for example, 100 msec) is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (A8903).

  Further, the game control device 100 saves a signal related to the completion of the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (the signal during the normal electric character 1 operation is off) in the test signal output data area (A8904). Subsequently, the common charge count number area for counting the number of winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is cleared (A8905), and further, the control pointer area in the common drawing is cleared (A8906). Thereafter, the end pointer area per common drawing is cleared (A8907), and the general electric ball remaining ball processing is ended.

[End processing per popular map]
Next, the details of the end-of-round-drawing processing (A7613) in the common-play game processing will be described. FIG. 102 is a flow chart showing the procedure of end processing per common drawing.

  The game control apparatus 100 first sets a process number "0" related to the ordinary drawing normal process (A9101), and further saves the process number in the ordinary drawing game process number area (A9102). Thereafter, a signal relating to the end of hit of the common drawing fluctuation game (normally, the signal is off during one per symbol) is saved in the test signal output data area (A9103).

  Furthermore, the game control device 100 saves a flag (in fraud monitoring period flag) defining the fraud monitoring period of the normal change winning a prize device 37 in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (A9104), and thereafter, processing per finish drawing Finish.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (A1311) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 103 is a flowchart of the segment LED editing process. In the segment LED editing process, the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, the general drawing reserve display 56, the first gaming state display unit 57, and the second gaming state display provided in the collective display device 50. The setting related to the driving of the segment LED constituting the unit 58, the third gaming state display unit 59, and the round display unit 60 is performed.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates the blink control timer by +1 (A9201), and determines whether it is an output on timing (A9202). When the specific bit of the blink control timer is 1, it is determined that the output on timing is reached. In the present embodiment, since the specific bit is bit 5, it is possible to create a blink cycle of 128 ms.

  If the game control device 100 has output on timing (the result of A9202 is "Y"), it sets general drawing reservation number display table 1 (A9203), and if it is not output on timing (the result of A9202 is "N") The common drawing reservation number display table 2 is set (A9204), display data corresponding to the common drawing reservation number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the common drawing reservation display 56 (A9205). If the number of reservations is 0 to 2, the display data will be the same in both tables of the number of general-purpose drawings suspension display table 1 and 2, so the general-image suspension display 56 does not blink, but if the number of reservations is 3 to 4, Since the display data of the figure holding number display table 1 and the display data of the common drawing holding number display table 2 are different, the common drawing hold display 56 blinks.

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the output on timing is reached (A9206). If the output on timing is set (result of A9206 is "Y"), the special figure 1 pending number display table 1 is set (A9207), and if the output on timing is not set (result of A9206 is "N"), the special figure 1 pending The number display table 2 is set (A9208), display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 reservation number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the special drawing 1 reservation display 54 (A9209).

  Next, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the output on timing is reached (A9210). If the output on timing is set (result of A9210 is "Y"), the special figure 2 reservation number display table 1 is set (A9211), and if the output on timing is not set (result of A9210 is "N") The number display table 2 is set (A9212), display data corresponding to the special drawing 2 reservation number is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the special drawing 2 reservation display 55 (A9213).

  After that, the game control apparatus 100 sets a round display LED display table in which the display mode in the round display unit 60 is defined (A9214), acquires display data corresponding to the round display LED output pointer, and displays the round display unit 60. Save to the segment area of (A9215).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 sets the game state display table 1 in which the display mode of the second game state display unit 58 or the like is defined (A9216). Further, display data corresponding to the gaming state display number is acquired and saved in the segment area of each gaming state display unit (A9217).

  Next, the gaming control apparatus 100 sets the gaming state display table 2 in which the display mode in the first gaming state display section 57 is defined (A9218). Further, display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 57 (A9219).

  Subsequently, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the high probability notification flag should be turned on (A9220), and when the high probability notification flag is not to be turned on (result of A9220 is "N"), that is, the low probability state In the case, the off data of the high probability notification LED (third gaming state display unit 59) is saved in the segment area (A9221). Thereafter, the segment LED editing process is ended. If the high probability notification flag should be turned on (the result of A9220 is “Y”), that is, if the high probability state, the state (A1023) in which the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area is maintained as it is , End the segment LED editing process.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process performed in the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 104 is a flowchart of the magnet fraud monitoring process. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor switch 61, and the start or the end of fraud notification is set.

  In the gaming control apparatus 100, the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is turned on, ie, abnormal, from the state of the detection signal which is output from the magnetic sensor switch 61 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2). It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (A9301).

  When the magnet sensor is on (the result of A9301 is "Y"), that is, when the game control device 100 detects an abnormal magnetism, it increments the magnet fraud monitoring timer that counts the detection period of the abnormal magnetism by +1. After updating (A9302), it is determined whether the timer has timed out (A9303).

  The game control apparatus 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer when the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (the result of A9303 is “Y”), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a fixed period ( A9304) The magnet fraud alert timer initial value (for example, 60 seconds) is saved in the magnet fraud alert timer area (A9305).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a command of magnet informing notification as a rendering command (A9306), and prepares a magnet injustice occurrence flag indicating that a magnet injustice has occurred as a magnet injustice flag (A9307). Furthermore, it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (A9313). That is, when the magnetic sensor switch 61 is continuously on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interrupts) set by the magnet fraud monitoring timer, it is determined that an abnormality occurs.

  On the other hand, when the magnet sensor (magnetic sensor switch 61) is not on (result of A9301 is "N"), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the game control device 100 clears the magnet fraud monitoring timer. (A9308). Then, if the magnet fraud notification timer defining the notification time of the magnet fraud is not 0, -1 is updated (A 9309). The minimum value of the magnet fraud alert timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is 0 (A9310). Also in the case where the magnet fraud monitoring timer has not timed out (the result of A9303 is “N”), the processing shifts to the processing of step A9309.

  If the value of the magnet fraud notification timer is not 0 (the result of A9310 is “N”), that is, if the time is not up, the game control apparatus 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process.

  In addition, when the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is 0 (the result of A9310 is “Y”), that is, when the time is up or the time is already up, the game control device 100 is a period for fraud alert If the informing notification is not performed from the beginning or the command of the magnet informing notification end is prepared as an effect command (A9311).

  Further, the game control device 100 prepares a magnet fraud release flag as the magnet fraud flag (A9312), and determines whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (A9313).

  Then, when the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A9313 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the magnet fraud monitoring process. On the other hand, if the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (the result of A9313 is "N"), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (A9314), and the rendering command setting is made. Execute the process (A9315). Thereafter, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 105 is a flow chart showing a procedure of board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. In the board radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is judged based on the detection signal from the radio wave sensor 62 (board radio wave sensor) of the game board, and the start and the end of fraud notification are set.

  In the gaming control apparatus 100, the radio wave sensor 62 is turned on from the state of the detection signal which is output from the radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the second input port 123 (input port 2) via the proximity I / F 121. It is determined whether an abnormal radio wave is detected (A9401). If the radio wave sensor is on (the result of A9401 is “Y”), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the radio wave fraud alert timer is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area ( A9402).

  Then, the game control apparatus 100 prepares a command of board radio wave informing notification as a rendering command (A9403), and prepares a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag indicating that a board radio wave fraud has occurred as a board radio wave fraud flag (A9404). Further, it is determined whether the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region (A 9409). That is, unlike the case of the magnetic fraud, in the case of the radio wave fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when an abnormal radio wave is detected.

  On the other hand, when the radio wave sensor is not on (result of A9401 is "N"), that is, when the abnormal radio wave is not detected, the game control apparatus 100 defines the radio wave informing timer for defining the notification time of the radio wave injustice. If is not 0, -1 is updated (A9405). The minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is 0 (A9406). If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not 0 (the result of A9406 is "N"), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave improper monitoring process is ended.

  Further, when the value of the radio wave informing timer is 0 (the result of A9406 is “Y”), that is, the time is up or the time is already up, and the game control apparatus 100 is a period of informing of fraud. If the informing notification has not been performed from the beginning, the radio wave informing notification end command is prepared as a rendering command (A9407). Further, a board radio wave fraud release flag is prepared as a board radio wave fraud flag (A9408), and it is determined whether the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region (A9409).

  Then, when the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (the result of A 9409 is “Y”), the game control device 100 ends the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. If the values do not match (the result of A 9409 is “N”), the prepared board radio wave fraud flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area (A 9410), and rendering command setting processing is executed (A 9411). After that, the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is ended.

[External information editing process]
Next, the details of the external information editing process (A1314) in the timer interrupt process will be described. FIG. 106 is a flowchart of the external information editing process. FIG. 106A shows the first half of the external information editing process, and FIG. 106B shows the second half of the external information editing process. In the external information editing process, the start opening error monitoring process (A2009), the payout command transmission process (A1305), the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (A1308), the magnet fraud monitoring process (A1312), the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (A1313) On the basis of the monitoring result in the above, information to be output to an external device such as an information collecting terminal or an internal control device for a game arcade or a test shot test device is created and set in an output buffer.

  The game control device 100 first determines whether a switch abnormality error is occurring (A9501). If a switch abnormal error is occurring (the result of A9501 is "N"), the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9502). If a switch abnormal error is occurring (the result of A9501 is "Y"), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A9503).

  Next, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether a glass frame opening error is occurring (A9504). If a glass frame opening error is not occurring (the result of A9504 is “N”), it is determined whether a body frame opening error (front frame opening error) is occurring (A9505). If the main frame opening error is not occurring (result of A9505 is "N"), the off data of door / frame opening signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9506), the off data of security signal is external information output data Save to area (A9507).

  If a glass frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9504 is “Y”), or if a main body frame opening error is occurring (the result of A9505 is “Y”), the game control device 100 is a door or a door. The on data of the frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (A 9508), and the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (A 9509).

  After steps A9507 and A9509, the game control apparatus 100 updates the security signal control timer by 1 if the timer is not 0 (A9510), and determines whether the security signal control timer is 0 (whether the time is up or not). It is determined (A9511). As the initial value of the security signal control timer, a predetermined time (for example, 256 msec) is set when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch or the like (A1029 of the main processing). Then, the security signal control timer is clocked from the time of RAM initialization.

  If the security signal control timer is not 0 (the result of A9511 is "N"), the game control device 100 saves the on data of the security signal in the external information output data area (A9512), and shifts to the processing of step A9513. That is, the fact that the data stored in the RAM has been initialized is output as external information.

  When the security signal control timer is 0 (the result of A9511 is “Y”), the game control device 100 determines whether or not magnet fraud is occurring (A9513). When the magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag region, it can be determined that the magnet fraud is occurring. If magnet fraud is not occurring (the result of A9513 is “N”), it is further determined whether board radio fraud is occurring (A9514). When the board radio wave fraud occurrence flag is saved in the board radio wave fraud flag area, it can be determined that the board radio wave fraud is occurring.

  When the board radio wave irregularity is not occurring (the result of A9514 is “N”), the game control device 100 further determines whether or not the special winning opening irregularity is occurring (A9515). It should be noted that if the incorrect winning occurrence flag for the special winning opening is saved in the incorrect flag area, it can be determined that a special winning opening injustice is occurring. If the big winning opening fraud is not occurring (the result of A9515 is “N”), it is further determined whether the common electric fraud is occurring (A9516). If the general electric power generation fraud is not occurring (the result of A9516 is “N”), it is determined whether or not the starting opening error is occurring (A9517). When the error occurrence flag is saved in the start opening error flag area, it can be determined that the start opening error is occurring. If the starting opening error is not occurring (the result of A9517 is “N”), it is further determined whether or not frame radio wave fraud is occurring (A9518).

  On the other hand, the game control apparatus 100, when the magnet fraud is occurring (the result of A9513 is "Y"), when the board radio wave fraud is occurring (the result of A9514 is "Y"), the special winning opening fraud is If it is being generated (the result of A9515 is "Y"), if it is in the case of a common power fraud occurrence (the result of A9516 is "Y") or if the start opening error is being generated (the result of A9517 is "Y And save the on data of the gaming machine error status signal in the test signal output data area (A9519). Thereafter, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (A9520), and main prize ball signal editing processing is executed to set information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out (A9521).

  The game control apparatus 100 also executes the main prize ball signal editing process (A 9521) even when the frame radio wave irregularity is not occurring (the result of A9518 is "N"). Details of the main prize ball signal editing process will be described later. Subsequently, the game control device 100 executes start opening signal editing processing for editing a winning combination signal of the start opening (A9522). Details of the starting opening signal editing process will be described later.

  Next, the game control device 100 updates the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game, if it is not 0, it updates -1 (A9523). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to zero.

  Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the symbol determination number control timer is 0 (A9524). If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is 0 (the result of A9524 is "Y"), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is output to the external information output data Save to the area (A9525), and complete the external information editing process.

  Further, when the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not 0 (the result of A9524 is "N"), that is, when the time is not up, the game control device 100 sets the on data of the symbol determination frequency signal to the external information. The file is saved in the output data area (A9526), and the external information editing process is ended.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (A 9521) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 107 is a flow chart showing the procedure of the main prize ball signal editing process. The main prize ball signal editing process outputs, to an external device, a main prize ball signal generated each time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (here 10). It is a process.

  If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0, the gaming control apparatus 100 first updates −1 (A9601). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control device 100 determines whether or not the value of the main winning ball signal output control timer is 0 (A9602).

  When the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A9602 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 further determines whether the number of times of main prize ball signal output is 0 or not. (A9603).

  Then, when the main prize ball signal output number is not 0 (the result of A9603 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball signal output number by -1 (A9604), and the main prize ball signal output The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved in the control timer area (A9605).

  Thereafter, the game control device 100 saves on data for turning on the main winning ball signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A 9607), and ends the main winning ball signal editing process. Also, if the main prize ball signal output count is 0 (the result of A9603 is “Y”), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. The main prize ball signal editing process is ended (A9608).

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9602 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period or not. Is determined (A9606). Here, that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output ON period means that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is equal to or longer than a predetermined time (for example, 64 msec).

  When the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on interval (the result of A9606 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs on data for turning on the main prize ball signal to the external information of RWM. Save to the data area (A 9607). Also, when the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (result of A9606 is "N"), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is RWM external information output data After saving in the area (A 9608), the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

[Starting mouth signal editing process]
Next, the details of the starting opening signal editing process (A9522) in the external information editing process will be described. FIG. 108 is a flowchart of the starting opening signal editing process. The start opening signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, and the start opening 3 switch 42a are input.

  The game control apparatus 100 first updates −1 if the starting opening signal output control timer is not 0 (A9701). The minimum value of the starting opening signal output control timer is set to zero. Then, the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is 0 (A9702).

  If the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is 0 (the result of A9702 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the number of times of starting opening signal output is 0 (A9703). Then, when the number of start opening signal outputs is not 0 (the result of A9703 is "N"), the number of start opening signal outputs is updated by -1 (A9704), and the start opening signal output control in the start opening signal output control timer area The timer initial value (for example, 128 msec) is saved (A 9705).

  After that, the game control device 100 saves on data for turning on the starting opening signal in the external information output data area of the RWM (A9707), and ends the starting opening signal editing process.

  In addition, when the number of start opening signal outputs is 0 (the result of A9703 is “Y”), the game control apparatus 100 outputs the external data of the RWM to the off data for turning off the start opening signal for the external device. The data is saved in the data area (A9708), and the start opening signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not 0 (the result of A9702 is "N"), the game control apparatus 100 determines whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period or not. (A9706). In addition, that a starting opening signal output control timer is in an output ON area is that the value of a starting opening signal output control timer is more than predetermined time (for example, 64 ms).

  When the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on interval (the result of A9706 is "Y"), the game control apparatus 100 turns on the starting opening signal ON data to the external information output data area of RWM. (A9707), and the start opening signal editing process is ended.

  In addition, when the starting opening signal output control timer is not in the output on section (result of A9706 is “N”), the game control device 100 sets off data for turning off the starting opening signal for the external device to RWM. The external information output data area is saved (A 9708), and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.

[Main processing (effect control device)]
First, the details of the main process performed by the effect control device 300 will be described. FIG. 109 is a flowchart showing a procedure of main processing (main program) executed by the effect control device 300. The main processing is executed by the main control microcomputer 311 (effect microcomputer) when the gaming machine 10 is powered on. The processes in the effect control device 300 are processes common to all the embodiments and modifications except for the round effect setting process, the ending effect setting process, and the effect content determination process, so the process executed in any embodiment I do not describe it.

  In the flowchart of the process executed by the effect control device 300, the sign (number) of the step is represented as "B ****".

  When the execution of the main process is started, the effect control device 300 first prohibits an interrupt (B0001). Next, initialization of the CPU 311 and VDP 312 is executed (B0002, B0003), and an interrupt is permitted (B0004). When the interruption is permitted, it becomes possible to execute the command reception interruption process for receiving the command transmitted from the game control device 100.

  Next, the effect control device 300 permits generation of display data to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like (B0005), and sets a random number seed used for random number generation (B0006). Then, the initial value at power on is saved in the area to be initialized (B 0007).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 clears the WDT (watch dock timer) (B0008). The WDT is activated by the above-described CPU initialization (B0002), and monitors whether the CPU 311 is operating normally. If the WDT is not cleared even after a predetermined period, the WDT times up and the CPU 311 is reset.

  Next, the effect control device 300 detects an operation signal of the effect button 25 by the player (signal of the effect button switch 25a or the touch panel 25b), or changes the effect content (setting) according to the detected signal. The effect button input process is executed (B0009). In the effect button input process, an effect button operation effect process to be described later is executed. Subsequently, a hall / player setting mode process for accepting an operation such as a change in the brightness or volume of the LED or liquid crystal by the player is executed (B0010). In the hall / player setting mode process, the player can customize the effect according to the effect points described later.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes an effect point control process of executing addition and clearing of effect points (B0011). In the effect point control process, an effect or an operation to be added to effect points is executed to execute effect point addition processing, and, at the end of the game, etc., so that effect points can be carried over to the next game, For example, information including information of effect points and the like is displayed on the display device 41 as a QR code (registered trademark).

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes random number update processing for updating random numbers such as effect random numbers (B0012), analyzes the received command received from the game control device 100, and executes the corresponding received command check processing (B 0013). The details of the reception command check process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect display editing processing for updating various data in accordance with the content to be displayed on the display device 41 or the like, or setting a drawing to be displayed on the display device 41 in the display frame buffer. (B 0014). The drawing data set at this time can update the image of the display device 41 without any problem as long as the VDP 312 can complete drawing within the frame period 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 msec). Then, preparation for drawing on the display frame buffer is completed, and setting for ending drawing command preparation is executed (B0015).

  Subsequently, the effect control device 300 determines whether it is the frame switching timing (B0015). When it is not the frame switching timing (the result of B0016 is "N"), the processing of B0016 is repeated until the frame switching timing comes, and when it is the frame switching timing (the result of B0016 is "Y") The screen drawing is instructed (B 0017). Since the frame period in the present embodiment is 1/30 second, frame switching is performed when, for example, periodic V blank (image update) every 1/60 second (1/2 of the frame period) is executed twice. . The interval may be further increased without updating the image in 1/60 seconds.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes a sound control process for controlling the sound output from the speaker 19 (B 0018).

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes decoration control processing for controlling the decoration device (the board decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18) formed of an LED or the like (B0019). In the decoration control process, for example, light emission control of a decoration device such as an LED is performed. Details of the decoration control processing will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes movable body control processing for controlling the effect device (panel effect device 44) such as a motorized product driven by a motor and a solenoid (B0020). In the movable body control process, operation control of the first movable service unit 500, the second movable service unit 550, the third movable service unit 600, the fourth movable service unit 650, and the fifth movable service unit 700 is executed. And perform other role operation effects by driving settings such as a solenoid.

  Further, the effect control device 300 executes light guide plate control processing for controlling the light emission effect of the light guide plate (the first light guide plate 680, the second light guide plate 683) (B0021). The light guide plate control process is the light guide plate control means in the gaming machine 10. Details of the light guide plate control process will be described later with reference to FIG.

  Then, when the process of B0021 described above is finished, the effect control device 300 returns to the process of B0008. Thereafter, the processing from B0008 to B0021 is repeated.

[Receive command check process]
Next, details of the received command check process (B0013) in the main process described above will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 110 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the reception command check process performed by the effect control device 300.

  In order to check the number of commands received from the game control device 100, the effect control device 300 first loads the value of the command reception counter in the command reception counter area of the RAM as the number of command receptions (B1101). Then, it is determined whether the number of received commands is not 0 (B1102). If the command reception number is 0, that is, if there is no command received from the game control apparatus 100 (the result of B 1102 is “N”), there is no command to analyze, and the reception command check process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the number of received commands is not 0, that is, when the command is received from the game control device 100 (result of B1102 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 receives the command reception counter of the command reception counter area. After subtracting the value by the number of received commands (B1103), the contents of the received command buffer of the RAM are copied to the command area for analysis (B1104). Here, since the receive command buffer is a ring buffer, there is no problem in subtracting the number of received commands before copying the contents in the buffer to the command area. Also, data is not overwritten even if a new command is received during copying.

  Then, the effect control device 300 updates the command readout index by +1 (adds 1) in the range of 0 to 31 (B1105). The receive command buffer is configured to be able to store up to 32 received commands. The received command is stored in the received command buffer in the order of the command read index 0 to 31. Here, the received command is read in the index order and copied to the command area for analysis. Note that at the timing when the copying to the analysis command area is completed, the storage area of the reception command buffer corresponding to the read command reading index is cleared.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether the copy of the command reception number loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1106), and if the copy is not completed (the result of B1106 is “N “), Repeat the processing of steps B1104 to B1106.

  When the effect control device 300 receives a command transmitted from the game control device 100, the content of the received command is stored in the reception command buffer and the command reception counter value in the command reception counter area is added and updated. Although 32 commands can be stored in the reception command buffer, analysis of the received command is separately performed in the command area for analysis. When the contents of the received command are copied to the analysis command area, the received command buffer and the command reception counter value are cleared. As described above, by always securing a free area in the reception command buffer without performing analysis directly, it is possible to prepare for mass reception of commands.

Subsequently, when the copy is completed (the result of B1106 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the received command contents of the analysis command area (B1107) and analyzes the contents. The process is executed (B1108). The details of the received command analysis process will be described later with reference to FIG. Also, the address of the command area for analysis is updated (B1109). Thereafter, it is determined whether the analysis of the command for the number of received command loaded in the process of step B1101 is completed (B1110), and if the analysis is not completed (the result of B1110 is "N"), step The processes of B1107 to B1110 are repeated. If the analysis is completed (the result of B 1110 is “Y”), the reception command check process is ended.

[Receive command analysis process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 111, the details of the received command analysis process (B1108) in the received command check process described above will be described. FIG. 111 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the received command analysis process executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first separates the upper byte of the received command as the MODE portion and the lower byte as the ACTION portion (ACT portion) (B1201). The command transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 is composed of a MODE part (MODE command) and an ACTION part (ACTION command), and is usually transmitted continuously from the MODE part indicating the type of command. Ru. Therefore, the upper and lower parts of the received command are configured in the order of the MODE part and the ACTION part.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE section is in the normal range (B1202). That is, it is determined whether it is a possible value (a value assigned as a command specification indicating the type) which can be taken by the MODE section indicating the type of command. Then, if the MODE part is in the normal range (the result of B 1202 is “Y”), it is similarly determined whether the ACTION part is in the normal range (B 1203). That is, it is determined whether it is a value (value assigned as a command specification indicating the content) that can be taken by the ACTION unit indicating the content of the command (specific rendering instruction or the like). Then, if the ACTION part is in the normal range (the result of B 1203 is “Y”), it is further determined whether the ACTION part for the MODE part is a correct combination (B 1204). That is, it is determined whether the value of the ACTION part is a possible value of the command of the type specified by the MODE part. Then, if the combination is correct (the result of B 1204 is “Y”), command processing according to the command system is executed in the processing after B 1205.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the value of the MODE section is within the range of the fluctuation system command (B1205). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the decoration special symbol, and there is a variation command. Then, if the MODE portion indicates a variable system command (the result of B1205 is “Y”), the variable system command process is executed (B1206), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a change system command (the result of B1205 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is in the range of a big hit system command (B1207). The jackpot command is a command for instructing an operation (display of a fanfare screen or a round screen, etc.) related to effects during a jackpot, for example, fanfare command (A5117), round command (A5702), interval command (A5903), It is an ending command (A5905) or the like. Then, if the MODE section indicates a big hit system command (the result of B 1207 is “Y”), the big hit system command process is executed (B 1208), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a big hit system command (the result of B1207 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is in the range of the symbol system command (B1209). In addition, as a symbol system command, there is a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern. Then, if the MODE section indicates a symbol system command (the result of B1209 is "Y"), symbol system command processing is executed (B1210), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a symbol system command (the result of B1209 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of a one-shot system command (B1211). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a single-shot system command (the result of B 1211 is “Y”), single-shot system command processing is executed (B 1212), and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a single-shot command (the result of B 1211 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the symbol system command read ahead (B 1213) . The pre-reading symbol system command includes the pre-reading stop symbol command described above. Then, if the MODE section indicates a pre-reading symbol system command (the result of B 1213 is “Y”), pre-reading symbol system command processing is executed (B 1214), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch symbol system command (the result of B 1213 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (B 1215) ). The prefetch variation system command includes the above-mentioned prefetch variation pattern command. Then, if the MODE portion indicates the prefetch change command (the result of B 1215 is “Y”), the prefetch change command process is executed (B 1216), and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the MODE unit does not represent the prefetch change system command (result of B1215 is “N”), the effect control device 300 can receive an unexpected command (for example, a command used only in the test mode) Because there is a problem, the reception command analysis process is terminated. Also, if the MODE part is not within the normal range (the result of B1202 is “N”), if the ACTION part is not within the normal range (the result of B1203 is “N”), or the ACTION part for the MODE part is not the correct combination ( The result of B 1204 is “N”), and the received command analysis process is ended.

[Variable system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 112, the details of the variable system command processing (B1206) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 112 is a flowchart showing a procedure of variable system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 determines whether or not the special view type (special view 1 or special view 2) of the received variation command (variation command) is undecided (B1301). If the special view type is unconfirmed (result of B1301 is “Y”), the variation system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not yet determined (the result of B1301 is "N"), the combination of the received variable system command and the symbol system command is checked (B1302), and whether the variable system command and the symbol type are inconsistent Is determined (B1303). Here, "mismatch" means contradiction in rendering, for example, when a symbol system command of a big hit symbol is received even though a variation system command of an off-set has been received. If the variation system command and the symbol type do not match (the result of B1303 is “Y”), the variation system command processing ends.

  If the variation system command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (the result of B1303 is "N"), the effect control device 300 determines the variation pattern type from the variation system command (variation command) (B1304), and the effect during variation is A change effect setting process for setting a certain change effect is executed (B1305). Note that multiple effects exist for the same variable system command. Subsequently, the special view variation is set to the gaming state flag indicating the gaming state (P machine state) (B1306), and if the number of pre-reading effects such as the continuous effect is not 0, -1 is updated (B1307).

[Change production setting process]
Next, with reference to FIG. 113, the details of the fluctuation effect setting process (B1305) in the above-described fluctuation system command process will be described. FIG. 113 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the fluctuation effect setting process executed by the effect control device 300.

  First, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the change pattern type is a no reach change (change that does not reach a reach state) (B1401). If the change pattern type is no reach change (the result of B1401 is "Y"), the model code, the special view type, and the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the effect mode are set (B1402), and the change system command ( The address of the first half advance distribution group table corresponding to the MODE part of the change command and the number of reservations of the special view type is acquired (B1403). In the case of no reach fluctuation, since the fluctuation time is shortened as the number of holdings increases, the table address corresponding to the number of holdings is acquired.

  If the variation pattern type is not reach change (the result of B 1401 is “N”), that is, if there is reach change, the effect control device 300 corresponds to the model code, the special view type, the effect mode, the first half corresponding to the symbol type A preliminary distribution group address table is set (B1404), and the address of the first half of the preliminary distribution group table corresponding to the MODE portion of the variation system command (variation command) and the variation pattern type is acquired (B1405).

  After the steps B1403 and B1405, the effect control device 300 performs a drawing of a notice for appearing during the first half of the movement (before reaching) (B1406). Then, set the model code, special figure type, effect mode, second half notice distribution group address table corresponding to symbol type (B1407), and the second half notice distribution group table address corresponding to the ACT part of the variation system command Acquired (B1408), and perform a lottery for notice to appear in the second half of the movement (during reach) (B1409). Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to the MODE part and the ACT part of the fluctuation system command (variation command) are determined (B1410). In addition, the fluctuation time, the main reach contents, etc. are known from the fluctuation system command.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines the content of the effect (notice effect) corresponding to the lottery result of the notice (B1411). Thereafter, in accordance with the contents of the fluctuation production such as the reach production and the like, and the contents of the notice production, the stop symbol of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is determined (B1412). Here, the decoration stop pattern is specifically determined, such as determining the scattered eyes in the case of the off pattern

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the fluctuation effect (B1413), and performs display setting of the advance effect (B1414). Subsequently, display setting of the hold reduction corresponding to the special drawing type is performed, and for example, an animation is set in which the hold display corresponding to the decorative special drawing that fluctuates this time is reduced (B1415). Subsequently, a voice number for determining the effect mode by the speaker and a decoration number for determining the effect operation of the decoration device are set (B1416).

  Next, the effect control device 300 performs display setting of the decoration special figure variation corresponding to the special figure type (B1417), and the fourth special symbol besides the above-mentioned first to third special symbols varying with the display device 41 The display setting of the fourth symbol variation regarding (the fourth symbol) is performed (B1418). The fourth symbol variation is displayed by the above-described lamp display device (LED) 80 provided in addition to the display device 41.

  Next, the effect control device 300 executes effect content determination processing for determining whether to change the reach content or to replace, after determining up to the notice of the variable display game to be executed next. B1419).

[Big hit system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 114, the details of the jackpot system command processing (B1208) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 114 is a flowchart showing the procedure of the jackpot-based command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the MODE part of the received big hit system command represents a fanfare (B1501). If the MODE part of the big hit system command indicates a fanfare (the result of B1501 is “Y”), that is, if the big hit system command is a fanfare command, the effect control device 300 executes a fanfare effect setting process (B1502), The fanfare in progress is set to the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P machine state) of the gaming machine 10 (B1503), and this processing ends. The round number upper limit value can also be obtained from the symbol type determined from the symbol system command (the decoration special figure command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern).

  If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent a fanfare (the result of B 1501 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit system command represents a round ( B1504). If the MODE section indicates a round (the result of B1504 is "Y"), that is, if the big hit system command is a round command, the effect control device 300 executes a round effect setting process (B1505), and the current gaming machine The game state flag indicating 10 game states (P machine states) is set to "round" (B1506), and this processing ends.

  When the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent a round (the result of B 1504 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit system command represents an interval ( B1507). If the MODE section indicates an interval (the result of B1507 is "Y"), that is, if the big hit command is an interval command, the effect control device 300 executes an interval effect setting process (B1508), and the current gaming machine During the interval is set to the gaming state flag indicating the gaming state (P machine state) of 10 (B1509), and this processing ends.

  If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent an interval (the result of B1507 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the MODE part of the big hit system command represents an ending ( B1510). If the MODE section indicates an ending (the result of B1510 is "Y"), an ending effect setting process is executed (B1511), and the ending is made in the gaming state flag indicating the current gaming state (P state of the gaming machine 10). The setting is made (B1512), and this processing ends.

  When the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not indicate the ending (the result of B 1510 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the MODE part of the big hit system command is the big winning opening count. It determines (B1513). If the MODE section indicates the special winning opening count (the result of B1513 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the short opening is currently in progress (B1514). If the short opening is not being performed (the result of B1514 is “N”), the effect control device 300 updates the acquired game ball number counter (B1515), and ends this processing.

  When the short opening is in progress (the result of B 1514 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 performs lottery to display the number of acquired balls (B 1516), and does not display the acquired number of gaming balls or not It is determined (B1517). When the number of acquired game balls is not displayed (the result of B1517 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 updates the non-display counter (B1518), and ends this processing. If the acquired gaming number of balls is not to be displayed (the result of B1517 is "N"), the effect control device 300 updates the short release pattern counter (B1519), and ends this processing.

  If the MODE part of the received big hit system command does not represent the big win count (the result of B 1513 is “N”), the effect control device 300 does not execute any processing, and the big hit system command processing Finish.

[Design system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 115, the details of the symbol system command processing (B1210) in the reception command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 115 is a flowchart showing a procedure of symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 sets a special view type corresponding to the MODE portion of the received symbol system command (the special decoration 1 command or the special decoration 2 command) (B1601). The special drawing type is special drawing 1 or special drawing 2. Then, the symbol type corresponding to the combination of the MODE part and the ACTION part (ACT part) of the symbol system command is set and saved in a predetermined area such as RAM (B1602). Here, since the distribution ratio of symbols changes in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2, a table is used for each MODE to set the symbol type. In addition, for example, the symbol type is an off symbol or a bumping hit symbol, 4R positive variation big hit symbol (4R-A1 etc), 4R normal big hit symbol (4R-A2 etc), 8R true variation big hit symbol (8R-A1 etc), 8R normal It corresponds to a big hit symbol (8R-A2 etc.), a 12R probability variation big hit symbol (12R-A1 etc), a 12R normal big hit symbol (12R-A2 etc).

[Single-shot command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 116, the details of the one-shot system command processing (B1212) in the reception command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 116 is a flow chart showing a procedure of single-shot command processing executed by the performance control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not the MODE section indicates a model designation command indicating the type of gaming machine (B1701). Then, if the MODE section indicates a model designation command (the result of B1701 is "Y"), model setting processing for setting the type of gaming machine is executed (B1702), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a model designation command (the result of B 1701 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a RAM initialization command (B 1703) ). Then, when the MODE unit represents a command for initializing the RAM (the result of B1703 is "Y"), the RAM initialization setting process for notifying the RAM initialization is executed (B1704), and the one-shot command process is performed. finish.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command for initializing the RAM (the result of B1703 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a command at the time of a power failure recovery. (B1705). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1705 is “Y”), the power failure recovery setting processing is executed (B1706), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command at the time of power failure recovery (the result of B1705 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a customer waiting demo command ( B1707). Then, if the MODE section indicates a customer waiting demo command (the result of B1707 is "Y"), the customer waiting demonstration setting process is executed (B1708), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the customer waiting demo command (the result of B1707 is "N"), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents the decoration special view 1 reservation number command (A3208) or not. It is determined (B1709). Then, if the MODE section indicates the decoration special figure 1 reservation number command (the result of B 1709 is “Y”), the special figure 1 holding information setting process is executed (B 1710), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not indicate the decoration special drawing 1 reservation number command (the result of B 1709 is “N”), the effect control device 300 next, the MODE unit displays the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command (A3203) It is determined whether it represents or not (B1711). Then, if the MODE section indicates the decoration special figure 2 reservation number command (the result of B 1711 is “Y”), the special figure 2 holding information setting process is executed (B 1712), and the one-shot system command process is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the decoration special drawing 2 reservation number command (the result of B 1711 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents the probability information command or not. (B1713). Then, if the MODE portion indicates a probability information command (the result of B 1713 is “Y”), the probability information setting processing is executed (B 1714), and the one-shot system command processing is ended.

  If the MODE unit does not represent the probability information command (the result of B 1713 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents an error / illegal command ( B1715). Examples of error / illegal commands include a fraud occurrence command (A2108), a fraud release command (A2116), a state off command (A2404), and a state on command (A2407). Then, if the MODE section indicates an error / illegal command (the result of B 1715 is “Y”), an error / illegal setting process for notifying or canceling the notification of an error or a fraud is executed (B 1716), End one-shot command processing.

  If the MODE unit does not represent an error / illegal command (the result of B 1715 is “N”), then the effect control device 300 causes the MODE unit to be a command for effect mode switching (for example, the effect of A5142). It is determined whether or not the mode switching preparation command is displayed (B1717). Then, if the MODE unit indicates a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1717 is “Y”), effect mode switching setting processing is executed (B1718), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

  If the MODE unit does not represent a command for effect mode switching (the result of B1717 is “N”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the MODE unit represents a symbol stop command. (B1719). The command for symbol stop includes, for example, the symbol stop command of the special view 1 and the symbol stop command of the special view 2. Then, if the MODE section represents a symbol stop command (the result of B1719 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 then determines whether the command of the MODE section is a normal command ( B1720).

  If the command of the MODE section is a normal command (the result of B1720 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets the stop mode of the corresponding special view (B1721), and the game is performed after all symbols have been stopped. The status flag is set to the normal status (B1722), and the one-shot system command processing ends. In the process of B1724, as an example, the gaming state flag is set to the normal state, but depending on the timing at which this processing is executed, the gaming state flag is a flag of "under fluctuation", "big hit", and "small hit" Is set.

  On the other hand, if the MODE unit does not represent a command for symbol stop (the result of B1719 is "N"), or if the command of the MODE unit is not normal (the result of B1720 is "N"), the effect control device In step 300, the one-shot command processing ends.

[Ahead reading symbol system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 117, the details of the pre-read symbol system command processing (B1214) in the reception command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 117 is a flowchart showing a procedure of pre-reading symbol system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the latest hold information is information of special view 1 hold (special view 1 start storage), for example, the latest received decoration special view hold number command is the number of special view 1 hold It is determined whether it is a command (B1801). When the latest hold information is information of special view 1 hold (the result of B 1801 is “Y”), prefetch symbol system command (prefetch stop symbol command) to the special view 1 look ahead symbol command area corresponding to the special view 1 hold count Save (B1802).

  If the latest hold information is not the information of the special view 1 hold (the result of B 1801 is “N”), that is, the decoration special view hold number command received latest is the decoration special view 2 hold number command In this case, the pre-reading symbol system command (pre-reading stop symbol command) is saved in the special figure 2 pre-reading symbol command area corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number (B1803).

  After steps B 1802 and B 1803, the effect control device 300 sets a prefetch fluctuation system command reception wait flag indicating that the reception of the prefetch fluctuation system command is awaited (B 1804). This is because the pre-reading symbol system command and the pre-reading variation system command are set, so the pre-reading variation system command is transmitted from the game control device 100 following the pre-reading symbol system command. After that, the pre-reading symbol system command processing ends.

[Read-ahead change system command processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 118, details of the prefetch change system command processing (B1216) in the received command analysis processing described above will be described. FIG. 118 is a flow chart showing a procedure of pre-reading variation system command processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether or not waiting for the reception of the prefetch change system command (B1901). When the above-described read-ahead change system command reception waiting flag (B1604) is set, it can be determined that the reception of a read-ahead change system command is being awaited. If it is not waiting to receive the prefetch change command (the result of B1901 is “N”), the prefetch change command processing ends. When waiting for the reception of the prefetch change command (the result of B1901 is “Y”), the read change flag for the prefetch change command is cleared (B1902).

  Next, the effect control device 300 (sub board) sets the prefetch fluctuation mode conversion table corresponding to the number of reservations of the symbol (special figure 1 or special figure 2) of the latest retention information (B1903), and the prefetch fluctuation system command The sub-prediction change command MODE portion is acquired corresponding to the MODE portion (B1904). Next, the pre-reading fluctuation ACT conversion table is set (B1905), and the in-sub pre-reading fluctuation command ACT section corresponding to the ACTION section (ACT section) of the pre-reading fluctuation system command is acquired (B1906).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the converted MODE part and ACT part (that is, the sub-prediction change command MODE part and ACT part) are other than 0 (B1907). If the command is normal (valid), it is converted to other than 0. When the converted MODE part and ACT part are both other than 0 (the result of B1907 is “Y”), the converted command consisting of the converted MODE part and ACT part corresponds to the latest hold information and the number of holds The file is saved in the read ahead change command area (the special view look ahead change command area or the special view 2 look ahead change command area) (B1908). Then, the pre-read command consistency check process is executed (B1909), and it is determined whether or not the combination of the converted MODE portion and ACT portion is normal (B1910).

  It should be noted that the time of the first half fluctuation corresponding to the MODE section changes according to the number of reservations when holding starts the variable display game. When the suspension starts the variable display game, if there is no other suspension, it becomes the longer first half fluctuation, and if the new suspension occurs and the number of reservations is large, it becomes the shorter first half fluctuation. Therefore, the MODE portion of the received prefetch change system command is converted into the in-sub-prediction change command MODE portion so that the internal command of the effect control device 300 can be handled the same even if the time value of the first half change is transitioned.

  In addition, since the type of reach is not related to the number of reservations, the second-half fluctuation corresponding to the in-sub-prediction fluctuation command ACT portion does not depend on the number of reservations. However, since there is also a kind of reach of the same system, if the effect control device 300 is used as it is without converting the ACT part (value of the second half fluctuation) of the pre-reading fluctuation system command, the number increases and the check becomes difficult . For example, normal reach also includes types such as normal reach-1 stop and normal reach + 1 stop. Therefore, the ACT part indicating the reach of the same system is converted into the same sub inner pre-reading fluctuation command ACT part, thereby reducing the number and reducing the burden of check processing such as pre-read command consistency check processing.

  Next, when at least one of the converted MODE unit and ACT unit (that is, the sub-prediction change command MODE unit and ACT unit) is 0, the effect control device 300 (the result of B1907 is “N”), or If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is not normal (the result of B 1910 is “N”), it is assumed that there is an abnormality in the converted command, and the prefetch change system command processing is ended.

  If the combination of the MODE part and the ACT part after conversion is normal (the result of B 1910 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 loads the hold information (information of the latest hold) to be prefetched from the prefetch change command area. (B1911), the pre-reading lottery process regarding pre-reading effect of the latest retention is executed (B1912).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the latest hold previewing notice effect occurs (B1913). If the latest hold previewing advance notice effect occurs (the result of B1913 is "Y"), the hold information corresponding to the existing hold is loaded (B1914), and the change effect based on the hold of the prefetch mode and the change effect based on the existing hold The content is compared (B1915).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the same change content exists in the comparison process of B1915 (B1916). If the same variation content does not exist (the result of B1916 is “N”), the effect control device 300 sets the pre-reading effect content (B1917), and ends this processing.

  If the same variation content exists (the result of B1916 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 saves the prefetch execution flag in a predetermined temporary area (B1918), and the number of pending reservations currently stored Save (B1919).

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the generated advance notice effect is an effect to be started immediately (B1920). There are, for example, pending change notices in the effect that starts immediately. If the preview advance notice effect that occurs is an effect that immediately starts (the result of B 1920 is “Y”), the display corresponding to the selected prefetch effect is set (B 1921), and the role control corresponding to the selected prefetch effect Information is set (B1922). Then, the prefetch change command processing ends.

  On the other hand, the effect control device 300 does not generate the latest previewing advance notice effect (the result of B1913 is “N”), or does not produce the immediate advance notice effect that is generated immediately (the result of B1920 is “N”) ), As it is. End the read ahead variation command processing.

[Decorative control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 119, the details of the decoration control process (B0019) in the main process described above will be described. FIG. 119 is a flowchart showing a procedure of decoration control processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the present time is the frame update timing of the display device 41 (B2001). When it is the frame update timing (the result of B2001 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 is respectively added to a plurality of effect patterns such as a fluctuation pattern and a big hit scene in the case of a fluctuation display game prepared in advance. The present luminance data table is acquired based on the effect number corresponding to the current effect among the effect numbers being displayed (B2002).

  Next, the effect control device 300 acquires luminance data corresponding to the current number of frames (frame number) from the luminance data table (B2003), acquires lighting data specifying an LED to be lighted, and outputs lighting data An instruction to write to the setting register is issued (B2004).

  If it is not the frame update timing (the result of B2001 is “N”), the effect control device 300 executes the process of the next B2005 without performing the process of B2002 to B2004.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether the present time is the fanfare start timing (B2005). If it is the fanfare start timing (the result of 2005 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 emits light in the light emission mode of the right-handed instruction for the LED provided to the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 Setting (B2006), and the process ends. The light-emitting mode of the right-handed instruction is, for example, a mode in which light is repeatedly emitted so as to flow clockwise (clockwise) in an arc of about 240 ° from the left to the lower right of the game board 30. In this light emission mode, since the range overlaps with the flow path of the gaming ball at the time of right hitting (special hitting), the player can intuitively grasp that it is the right hitting timing.

  On the other hand, when it is not the fanfare start timing (the result of B2005 is “N”), the effect control device 300 determines whether the present is the end timing of the specific gaming state (B2007). If it is the end timing of the specific gaming state (the result of B2007 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 emits a leftward striking instruction to the LED provided to the panel decoration device 46 and the frame decoration device 18 for a predetermined period. It is set to emit light in an aspect (B2008), and this processing ends. When it is not the end timing of the specific gaming state (the result of B2007 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the present process. The light-emitting mode of the left-handed instruction is, for example, a mode in which light is repeatedly emitted so as to flow counterclockwise (counterclockwise) over about 240 ° in an arc shape from the lower right to the left of the game board 30.

[Light guide plate control processing]
Next, with reference to FIG. 120, the details of the light guide plate control process (B 0021) in the main process described above will be described. FIG. 120 is a flowchart showing a procedure of light guide plate control processing executed by the effect control device 300.

  The effect control device 300 first determines whether the present time is the character display timing (B2101). If it is the character display timing (the result of B2101 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets all the light emission modes for the LEDs on the lower side of the first light guide plate (B2102). If it is not the character display timing (the result of B2101 is "N"), the effect control device 300 does not execute the process of B2101.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether the present is the sequential light emission timing of the effect display (B2103). When it is the sequential light emission timing of the effect display (the result of B2103 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sequentially sets the light emission mode to the LEDs on the right side of the first light guide plate (B2104). When it is not the sequential light emission timing of the effect display (the result of B2103 is “N”), the effect control device 300 does not execute the process of B2104.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current is the light emission timing of all the effect display (B2105). If it is the light emission timing of all the effect display (the result of B2105 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sets all the light emission modes for the LEDs on the right side of the first light guide plate (B2106). When it is not the light emission timing of all the effect display (the result of B2105 is “N”), the effect control device 300 does not execute the processing of B2106.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether the present is the sequential light emission timing of the shutter display (B2107). When it is the sequential light emission timing of the shutter display (the result of B2107 is “Y”), the effect control device 300 sequentially sets the light emission mode to the LEDs on the right side of the second light guide plate (B2108). When it is not the sequential light emission timing of the shutter display (the result of B2107 is “N”), the effect control device 300 does not execute the process of B2108.

  Next, the effect control device 300 determines whether or not the current time is the light emission timing of the shutter display (B2109). When it is the light emission timing of all the shutter display (the result of B2109 is "Y"), the effect control device 300 sets all the light emission modes for the LEDs on the right side of the second light guide plate (B2110). End the process. If it is not the light emission timing of all the shutter display (the result of B2109 is “N”), the effect control device 300 ends the present processing without executing the processing of B2110.

  In the present embodiment, after the end of the big hit state (first special game state), the variable display game is more likely to become the special result aspect (first special result aspect) than the normal game state (a big hit state tends to occur) Although (probability fluctuation state) is not generated, normal gaming state (low probability state), time saving state (low probability state + general power support state) or positive change state (high probability state + general power support state) after the end of the big hit state ) May be generated. Also, the probability change state (probability fluctuation state) may be continued until the next big hit state (first special game state) occurs, or when the fluctuation display game is executed a predetermined number of times (for example, 100 times) It is also possible to finish the process or to finish when the player has won a predetermined falling lottery.

[One embodiment of the present invention]
The following inventions can be mentioned as inventions related to the gaming machine described so far.

  (11) In a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, a drive source for driving an effect member, and a plurality of drive force transfer members for transmitting the drive force of the drive source to the effect member When the drive source shifts from the first drive mode to the second drive mode, the predetermined sound generated from the plurality of drive force transmission members becomes the first volume, and the drive source receives the second drive mode from the second drive mode. When transitioning to the 3 drive mode, the predetermined sound generated from the plurality of driving force transmitting members changes from the first volume to the second volume, and the predetermined sound generated from the plurality of driving force transmitting members in accordance with the progress of the game A game machine characterized by being changeable to the first volume and the second volume.

  (12) The fluctuation winning device includes a normal fluctuation winning device capable of converting the opening and closing member into an open state and a closed state, and the normal gaming state and the ordinary fluctuation winning device to the ordinary fluctuation winning device than the normal gaming state. The gaming state control means for setting any of the gaming states of the specific gaming state in which winning is easy is provided, and in the period of the normal state, the movable combination pivots in a rotation direction opposite to the predetermined rotation direction, The gaming machine according to (11), wherein the movable role rotates in a predetermined rotation direction during the specific gaming state.

  (13) The gaming machine according to (11) or (12), wherein the movable part stops rotating for a predetermined period each time a predetermined period elapses.

  (14) An arc-shaped light emitting device is provided in the game area, and the light emitting device emits light in the same direction as the predetermined rotation direction during the specific gaming state (11) ) The gaming machine according to (13).

  (15) The gaming machine according to any one of (11) to (14), wherein the light emitting device blinks only during a period in which the special hit is advantageous to the player by the light emitting device provided in the game area.

(Modification 1 of the first embodiment)
In the first modification of the first embodiment, an invention will be described in which the drive sound of the entire accessory produced by the drive of the motor is used for the effect. Hereinafter, an example related to the change of the drive noise generated from the gear (s) corresponding to the change of the drive speed (rotational speed) of the motor will be described.

  Generally, an accessory made up of a plurality of movable parts is transmitted from a drive source (motor) for supplying a driving force, a driving force transmitting member (gear) for transmitting the driving force to a rendering member, and a driving force transmitting member A friction sound or a collision sound is generated between the movable parts when moving including a rendering member movable by the driving force. Here, the second movable role product 550a is one where ten or more decorative rotating bodies 581 (rendering members) rotate, and as shown in FIGS. 9 and 10, 18 work gears 561 and 17 work gear 561s. The intermediate gear 562 is simultaneously rotated in accordance with the drive of the motor 557. At the time of driving these gears (driving force transmitting members), in addition to the driving noise of the motor 557, the sound of meshing between the gears and the rotation noise generated from the rotation axes of the gears are generated. The player who is seated can recognize the sound generated from the second movable role 550a even if the glass frame 15 is interposed between the player and the second movable role 550a. The same applies to the third movable character 600a.

  That is, since the plurality of gears are driven by the second movable part 550a based on the driving of one motor 557, the driving noise of the motor 557, the collision noise generated from each gear, the sliding noise, the rotational noise Etc. are transmitted to the player through the glass frame 15.

  Further, since the third movable product 600a is driven by the plurality of gears based on the driving of one motor 607, the driving noise of the motor 607, the collision noise generated from each gear, the sliding noise, the rotation noise Etc. are transmitted to the player through the glass frame 15.

  The operating noises of these prizes are transmitted as the driving speed of the drive source, that is, the volume that can be recognized by the player at low, medium, or high velocity of the operating speed of the prizes. The interest of the game can be improved by utilizing it in part. The action sound of the part is a so-called mechanical sound, which is a sound that feels an interest and an expectation, and brings about an effect of further deepening the view of the work provided by the gaming machine 10.

  Next, the relationship between the operating speed of the drive source and the sound generated from the drive source will be described. FIG. 121 is a chart of the operating speed of the drive source of the modification 1 of the first embodiment and the sound generated from the entire character. The horizontal axis indicates the rotational speed of the motor, and the vertical axis indicates the magnitude of the sound produced from the entire character.

  The motor 557 and the motor 607 can be divided into three areas of low speed, medium speed, and high speed as the rotational speed of the speed area for driving the accessory, and the low speed area is the first drive mode and the medium speed area is the second drive mode. The high speed range is taken as a third drive mode.

  In the work gear 561 and the intermediate gear 562, when the drive source (motor) rotates in the low speed range, the drive noise is large, and when the drive source rotates in the middle speed range, the drive noise is small. And, when the drive source rotates in the high speed range, the sounds (sounds generated from the entire product, predetermined sound) generated from the work gear 561 and the intermediate gear 562 become larger than when the drive source rotates in the middle speed range The sound (predetermined sound) generated from the entire character is smaller than when rotating in the region.

  In addition to the sound generated from the gear, the sound generated from the motor can also be included in the sound generated from the entire character (predetermined sound).

  The motor 557 (see FIG. 9) and the motor 607 (see FIG. 12) are, for example, stepping motors having characteristics such as minimum driving noise and vibration in the medium speed range, but the stepping motors have digital rotation angles. Because of being proportional to the number of pulses, fluctuations in dynamic characteristics and static characteristics occur based on the relationship between the circuit (driver) for generating the pulses and the armature. The motor 557 and the motor 607 may be, for example, a direct current motor (DC motor).

  Although the drive noise of the motor is caused by various factors, for example, the vibration noise generated by the motor and the drive noise of the motor from the built-in or external reduction gear are generated. Here, the stepping motor is a main factor of the vibration that repeating the fine movement of moving the rotor, passing the rotor, swinging back the rotor, and stopping the rotor many times for each pulse input. In particular, the vibration becomes large at low speed rotation of 100 to 200 pps, and the vibration becomes minimum at medium speed rotation of about 500 pps.

  Then, as the rotational speed of the motor increases, the rotor moves to the next step as soon as it comes to rest, so the vibration decreases and it rotates smoothly, but when the pulse speed increases, the excitation is performed before rotating to the target angle. Since the rotor can not follow and a step out occurs because the process proceeds to the next step, vibrations increase at high speed than in the middle speed range. Therefore, the volume relation generated from the motor is established in the order of low speed> high speed> medium speed. However, the magnitude relation of the volume generated from the motor described here is an example, and the volume produced from the motor may be large in the high speed range than the low speed range, and the magnitude relation of the volume is determined by the motor design. .

  FIG. 122 is a diagram showing the rotational speed of the motor, the rotational speed of the gear, the operating speed of the accessory, and the magnitude of the sound produced from each part in the first modification of the first embodiment. A sound obtained by combining the sound generated from the motor and the sound generated from the gear corresponds to the sound (predetermined sound) generated from the entire character.

  In the above-mentioned example, when the rotational speed of the motor is low, the drive noise of "Large" volume, at medium speed, the drive noise of "Large" volume, and at high velocity, the drive noise of "Large" volume is a motor It originates from In the gear rotation speed, when the gear rotation speed is low, the drive sound of "high" volume, at medium speed, the drive sound of "low" volume, and at high speed, the drive sound of "medium" volume Comes from the gear.

  The sound generated from the gear is generated by various factors as in the motor, but as an example, the sound when the gear meshes is the main factor, and is transmitted from the sliding sound or the motor generated from the rotation shaft of the gear Vibration is also a source of noise from gears.

  When the rotational speed of the gear is low (as a rule, about 20 revolutions per minute in the work gear 561), the load (frictional force) for rotating the rotating decorative member 581 attached to the work gear 561 and the motor 557 The vibration of the gear is transmitted to each gear, and the gear as a whole rotates with a slight lack of smoothness. Therefore, from each gear, a meshing sound of gears "gacha, gacha, ..." is generated, and a loud sound is generated as the volume.

  When the rotational speed of the gear is medium (as a rule, about 50 revolutions per minute in the work gear 561), the load on the gear is reduced by the inertial force of the rotating decorative member 581 compared to that at low speed. In addition, since the vibration of the motor 557 driven at a medium speed is significantly reduced compared to that at low speed, the vibration transmitted from the motor 557 is also reduced, and the vibration transmitted to each gear is greatly reduced to make the gear as a whole smoothly. Rotate. As a result, each gear produces a meshing sound of "Gararara Rara · · ·", and a smaller volume of sound is produced than at low speed.

  When the rotational speed of the gear is high (as a rule, about 90 revolutions per minute in the work gear 561), the entire gear smoothly rotates as in medium speed, but the rotational speed is higher than at medium speed. Because the speed of the gear is fast, the amount of gear meshing per unit time increases, and the sound of gear meshing "Gararara la la la la la ..." is generated. Although the volume generated from the gear at high speed is higher than that at medium speed, the smooth rotation of the gears results in a smaller volume than at low speed.

  And the volume generated from the whole of the character as the sum of the volume generated from the motor and the volume generated from the gear is "large" when the operating speed of the character (rotational decoration member 581) is low and "small" at medium speed, At high speed, it will be "medium".

  FIG. 123 is a diagram for explaining the contents of effects in the reach change of the modification 1 of the first embodiment. Here, the effects relating to the sound and vibration of the gear based on the fluctuation display game as the reach fluctuation will be described.

  When the variable display game is started and the reach occurs, the motor 557 and the motor 607 rotate from the stop state at a medium speed. Since the motor 557 and the motor 607 rotate at a medium speed until the middle stage of the reach effect, the driving noise and vibration generated from the gears become small from the reach generation to the middle stage of the reach.

  Then, when the reach effect reaches the final stage, the motor 557 and the motor 607 become low speed, and the sound and vibration generated from the gear become large. Such an effect is an effect for attracting the player's attention as to the whereabouts of the reach by changing the sound from the gear from a small volume to a large volume. In other words, the player recognizes that reach production is approaching the final stage due to the sound generated from the gear becoming louder while watching the vicinity of the start opening and the start memory up to the middle of the reach production. , I will pay attention to which symbol the remaining one identification symbol in the movement is stopped.

  Further, as described with reference to FIG. 122, the driving noise generated from the motor itself changes in accordance with the rotational speed of the motor. Therefore, the driving sound generated from the motor itself is also changed from a small volume to a large volume due to the low speed of the rotation toward the end of the reach effect, which brings an auxiliary effect of attracting the player's attention. That is, in addition to the driving noise and vibration generated from the gear, the driving noise and vibration generated from the whole of the character object increase due to the driving noise and vibration generated from the motor, so the transmission power to the player is increased.

  As described above, when the motor sound and the gear sound increase at the end of the reach production, the player's expectation can be improved through hearing, and the interest of the game can be improved.

  Here, at the timing when the motor noise and gear noise change from "small" to "large", the output sound (speaker sound, effect sound) from the speaker 19 (sound output means) changes from "large" to "small" It is suppressed. The suppression of the volume of the speaker 19 leads to the player being more strongly aware of the sound (predetermined sound) generated from the prize in the game arcade which is generally not quiet. Also, from the relationship between the speaker sound "large" and the motor sound and the gear sound "small", the speaker sound "small" and the motor sound and the gear sound "large" are related, and the volume of the motor and gear relative to the speaker volume The contrast of the game can be increased to give the player a sense of surprise and a sense of expectation, and the interest of the game can be enhanced.

  FIG. 124 is a view for explaining the contents of effect in the pseudo continuous effect (simulated continuous effect) of the modification 1 of the first embodiment. Here, effects of sounds and vibrations of the motor and the gear based on the variable display game in which three pseudo continuous fluctuations (simulated fluctuations) are executed will be described. The pseudo series effect (pseudo continuous rendering) is a pseudo stop display (pseudo stop display) of a plurality of decorative special symbols variably displayed until the final stop result display in one special figure change display game The game is an effect in which the pseudo fluctuation display game (pseudo continuous fluctuation, pseudo fluctuation, sub fluctuation) to be played is performed a predetermined number of times. At the time of the pseudo stop display, the pseudo run symbol which suggests the pseudo continuous effect may be stopped and displayed.

  In the variable display game, when the first pseudo continuous fluctuation is started by the appearance of the pseudo continuous symbol, the motor 557 and the motor 607 rotate at a medium speed from the stop state. Therefore, the volume and the vibration generated from the work gear 561 and the intermediate gear 562 become small during the first period of the pseudo link fluctuation. In addition, since the motor 557 and the motor 607 rotate at a medium speed, the volume and the vibration generated from the motor 557 and the motor 607 become small.

  At this time, the speaker sound is also small so that the motor sound and gear sound which are small in volume are not erased by other sounds. The sound may be output from the speaker 19 regardless of the rotational speed of the motor or gear.

  Subsequently, when the second pseudo random change starts, the motor 557 and the motor 607 become high speed, and the volume and the amount of vibration generated from the gear become “medium”. Furthermore, when the third pseudo-series fluctuation is started, the motor 557 and the motor 607 become low speed, and the volume and the amount of vibration generated from the gear become "large". The speaker sound also increases as the gear sound increases, and becomes "medium" at the second pseudo run and "large" at the third pseudo run.

  This effect is produced by the speaker sound and the volume and vibration generated from the gear changing to "small", "medium", and "large" while the pseudo-series fluctuation progresses to the first, second and third times. Hope for the development of Furthermore, while the second movable character 550a and the third movable character 600a rotate with good tempo as "Gararara la la la la la ..." in the second time of the pseudo continuous variation, 3 of the pseudo continuous variation Since the second movement of the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a is slow, and the sound is generated slowly like "Gacha, Gacha, ..." It becomes a notice. Therefore, the player looks closely at the third effect of the pseudo random change, and the interest of the game is improved.

  On the other hand, it is not only the screen of the display device 41 that is fluctuating, but also changes in light emission patterns of features and decoration members around the screen, etc., by the fact that the volume and vibration of the gear in the first run of pseudo random variation are "small" Can be expected to be seen by That is, by changing the sound volume and vibration of the gear in accordance with the development of the pseudo-series effect, it is possible to make the player's consciousness turn to the effect that the player wants to see appropriately. As a result, the interest of the game can be improved.

  In addition, as an example of utilizing "large", "medium" and "small" of gear noise, it is confirmed whether the predetermined performance is exhibited without relying only on the visual inspection of the inspector at the time of shipment of the gaming machine 10 as an example Can be used to Since the examiner can confirm the initial movement using a plurality of sense organs such as vision and hearing, the quality of examination and the efficiency of examination improve.

  In addition, when the player etc. changes the setting of the sound volume of the gaming machine 10, the brightness of the screen, the contents of the effect, etc., the next setting item is selected, the setting is accepted, the setting is cancelled, etc. Gear can rotate at low speed, medium speed and high speed. In the game arcade, it is possible to confirm by visual (display device and decoration rotating body) and hearing (gear sound) that the setting of the gaming machine 10 has been changed, so the setting operation intended or not intended by the player is It is easy for the player to confirm that it has been done. From the viewpoint of confirmation of the setting operation, the gear may be rotated (a prize is movable) only when the setting is changed.

  In addition, by moving the stopped second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600 at low speed at predetermined timing or random timing while waiting for a customer, a large volume of gear sound is generated, The game machine 10 can be appealed by attracting the attention of people around the game arcade.

  Further, as an error notification, the player and the store clerk are notified that an error has occurred by increasing the volume of the gear, and the volume of the gear is increased at the time of the initial operation to notify that the initial operation is in progress. be able to.

  The change in gear volume is not limited to the form (small or large, medium, large or large) described in this modification, and large, medium, large, medium, large, medium or large, medium, large, small, medium, large, large or small , Small, medium, large, and so on, and appropriately changing the volume according to the progress (representation) of the game is also included.

[Effect of Modified Example 1 of First Embodiment]
In this manner, the player's attention is drawn to the center of the effect or the player's awareness is produced by the motor sound generated according to the rotational speed of the motor and the sound generated from the gear rotating according to the drive of the motor. It can be sent from the center to another.

  When the motor and gear shift from the medium speed range to the low speed range, the noise (predetermined sound) and the vibration generated from the motor and gear change from small amount to large amount, thereby attracting the player's attention to the center of the effect. It is possible to increase the player's expectation by the increased predetermined sound.

  Further, by controlling the magnitude of the output sound from the speaker 19 in accordance with the change in the volume and vibration of the motor and the gear, the player can more easily recognize the motor sound and the gear sound.

  Further, the efficiency of the inspection of the initial operation of the gaming machine 10 at the time of shipment can be improved by the “large”, “medium” and “small” of the motor noise and the gear noise. Furthermore, in the setting of the volume of the gaming machine 10, the brightness of the screen, the contents of the effect, etc., “high”, “medium” and “low” of the motor sound and the gear sound change according to the operation of the effect button 25 As described above, whether the effect button 25 or the like is operated is transmitted through the operator's sight and hearing, and the efficiency of setting operation can be improved. In addition, the motor sound and gear sound changing in response to the operation of the effect button 25 for changing the setting and the move of the character improve the satisfaction with the operation, and the player performs the operation for setting. Be an active motive.

[One embodiment of the present invention]
The invention regarding the effects utilizing the "large", "medium" and "small" of the motor noise and gear noise described so far, and the effects utilizing the "large", "medium" and "small" of the motor vibration and gear vibration The following inventions can be mentioned as inventions.

  (16) In a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, a drive source for driving a rendering member, and a plurality of driving force transmission members for transmitting the driving force of the drive source to the rendering member When the drive source shifts from the first drive mode to the second drive mode, the predetermined sound generated from the plurality of drive force transmission members becomes the first volume, and the drive source receives the second drive mode from the second drive mode. When transitioning to the 3 drive mode, the predetermined sound generated from the plurality of driving force transmitting members changes from the first volume to the second volume, and the predetermined sound generated from the plurality of driving force transmitting members in accordance with the progress of the game A game machine characterized by being changeable to the first volume and the second volume.

  (17) A sound output unit capable of outputting a rendering sound is provided, and the volume of the rendering sound is changed in response to the predetermined sound being changed from the first volume to the second volume. The gaming machine according to (16).

  (18) In a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a predetermined start condition, a drive source for driving an effect member, and a plurality of drive force transfer members for transmitting the drive force of the drive source to the effect member When the drive source shifts from the first drive mode to the second drive mode, the vibrations generated by the plurality of drive force transmission members become the first vibration, and the drive source performs the second drive mode to the third drive. When the mode is shifted to the mode, the vibration generated by the plurality of driving force transmitting members becomes the second vibration from the first vibration, and the vibration generated by the plurality of driving force transmitting members is matched with the progress of the game. A game machine characterized by being changeable to vibration and second vibration.

  (19) A sound output unit capable of outputting a rendering sound is provided, and the volume of the rendering sound is changed in response to the change of the vibration from the first vibration to the second vibration. The gaming machine according to (18).

  In the invention described in (16) to (19) above, the “drive source” corresponds to, for example, the motor 557. The “driving force transmitting member” corresponds to, for example, the work gear 561 or the intermediate gear 562. Further, the “sound output means” corresponds to, for example, the speaker 19.

  The “first drive mode” corresponds to a mode in which the drive source drives in a low speed range, and the “second drive mode” corresponds to a mode in which the drive source drives in a medium speed range. The “third drive mode” corresponds to a mode in which the drive source drives at a high speed range.

  The "predetermined sound" is a mechanical sound at the time of driving generated from the entire character, and corresponds to the sound generated from the entire character. In addition, the “first volume” corresponds to, for example, the volume of “low” generated at medium speed as the volume generated from the entire character, and the “second volume” is, for example, “medium” generated at high speed The volume of corresponds.

  The “first vibration” corresponds to, for example, a “small” vibration state occurring at medium speed, and the “second vibration” corresponds to, for example, a “medium” vibration state occurring at high speed. .

(Modification 2 of the first embodiment)
In the second modification of the first embodiment, a colored light transmitting plate 88 is provided on the front surface of the upper effect unit 40c. The colored light transmitting plate 88 is, for example, a colored light transmitting member, and has an effect that the colored light transmitting plate 88 appears to emit light by a color different from the color of light behind. The light is split into a plurality of colors (ie, a plurality of wavelengths) when it passes through the prism, but the colored light transmission plate 88 attenuates a part of the wavelength range of the light passing from the rear to the front and Light is changed to light of a different wavelength range.

  The colored translucent member absorbs a wave number range corresponding to a specific color like a so-called color filter. For example, in a color filter that absorbs red (does not pass the wave number range corresponding to red) when receiving sunlight from behind, the blue-green color is emphasized, so the light-transmissive member looks blue-green.

  As a color filter effect, it is known that the color similar to the color of the color filter is emphasized, and the opposite color becomes difficult to see. For example, a yellow filter that absorbs short wavelength regions (blue) of visible light emphasizes yellow, and a red-purple filter that absorbs mid-wavelength regions (green) of visible light emphasizes red-purple, long wavelength regions of visible light The blue-green filter that absorbs (red) emphasizes blue-green.

  FIG. 125 is a front view of the game board of Modification 2 of the first embodiment. Also, FIG. 126 is an exploded perspective view of the game board unit according to the second modification of the first embodiment. Both are different from FIGS. 2 and 3 in that a colored light transmitting plate 88 is provided on the front surface of the upper effect unit 40c.

  As shown in FIGS. 125 and 126, the upper rendering unit 40c is disposed in front of the second movable part 550a. The upper effect unit 40c is configured of a colored light transmitting plate 88 and a support member (not shown) for supporting the colored light transmitting plate 88. The colored light transmitting plate 88 is, for example, a title of the gaming machine 10 (model name of gaming machine Etc.) is a single translucent member engraved. In addition, the second movable part front base 570 included in the second movable part 550 unit and the respective decorative rotating bodies 581 (see FIG. 9) are also formed of translucent members.

  The upper effect unit 40c has a smaller area than the second movable role object 550a. Then, the light of the LED provided on the LED substrate 568 causes the upper rendering unit 40c to emit light via the second movable part front base 570 and the decorative rotating members 581, and the upper rendering unit 40c is enhanced to be enhanced. .

  The upper effect unit 40c is an effect member that transmits the light of the illumination (the LED provided on the LED substrate 568 in FIG. 9) included in the second movable role unit 550 without the light emitting function inside. The upper effect unit 40c allows the player to view the second moveable object 550a via the upper effect unit 40c without interfering with the view of the second moveable feature unit 550. As described above, in light transmission, the upper effect unit 40c (colored light transmission plate 88) is decorated with a hue (hue) different from the color emitted by the LED substrate 568 in order to attenuate a part of the wavelength range greatly .

  Which wavelength region is greatly attenuated depends on the colored color of the colored light transmission plate 88. Here, when the white light of an LED produced by combining red, blue and green colors is seen, it looks red It is assumed that the color is colored. That is, the red wavelength range is not attenuated, and the blue-green wavelength range that is the opposite color of red is attenuated.

  Specifically, when the white LED light is received, the colored light transmitting plate 88 looks red. In addition, the colored light transmitting plate 88 looks red when it receives red LED light. In addition, when the orange LED light is received, the colored light transmitting plate 88 looks bright red (pomegranate). In addition, the colored light transmitting plate 88 looks orange when it receives yellow LED light. In addition, when the green LED light is received, the colored light transmitting plate 88 looks red. In addition, when the blue LED light is received, the colored light transmitting plate 88 looks purple. In addition, when the amber LED light is received, the colored light transmitting plate 88 looks dark red (garnet). In addition, the colored light transmitting plate 88 looks dark purple when it receives purple LED light. In addition, the colored light transmitting plate 88 looks dark navy blue (navy blue) when receiving blue LED light, and the colored light transmitting plate 88 looks bright red (burning red) when receiving pink LED light.

  The second movable character 550a and the third movable character 600a are capable of performing light propagation effects, and have rainbows (7 colors) so as to draw an arc starting from near the upper portion of the warp inlet 40a shown in FIG. Can be carried out. The propagation effect may be started when the fluctuation mode of the fluctuation display game becomes reach. That is, the second movable part 550a emits light in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, blue, and purple following white from near the upper part of the warp inlet 40a, and the seven colors are the second movable part The light is propagated in an arc shape by propagating the 550a and the third movable part 600a. These colors are not to be repeatedly turned on and off in order at regular time intervals, but to change the hue (hue) so as to flow with the gradation between the hues. Therefore, in the process in which the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a change from white to red, a pink that is an intermediate color between white and red is visible. Further, in the process of changing from green to blue, bluish green which is an intermediate color between green and blue is visible, and similarly, in the process of changing from green to blue, light blue is also visible.

  Note that, in the rainbow transmission effect, light may be emitted so as to sandwich the light off (light-off area) before light emission of the next seven colors starts after one round of seven colors. Specifically, red, orange, yellow, green, blue, blue, and purple are emitted in the order of white followed by fixed point at a fixed point, and after turning off for a certain period, red, orange, yellow, green as a second turn rainbow , Blue, amber, purple in order. As described above, once the light-off period is provided after seven rounds, it is easy to recognize the rainbow each time, and one round of rainbow (one round of seven colors) corresponds to one unit of reach effect, for example. In the case etc., it becomes easy for the player to recognize the break of the presentation, the development of the presentation, etc., and the interest of the game is improved.

  In addition, light may be emitted so as to sandwich the light off (light off region) for each of the seven colors. Specifically, at a fixed point, following white, light emission and light extinction are repeated in the order of light extinction, red, light extinction, yellow, light extinction, green, light extinction, blue, light extinction, blue, light extinction, light extinction, purple, and light extinction. As described above, when the turn-off area is provided in the propagation effect, the division of the color is clearly recognized for each of the seven colors, and the propagation state of light is more easily recognized. As the application of the light emission mode, for example, the case where seven colors are emitted rather than the case where six colors are emitted in the entire circumference of the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a Notification (implicit notification) such as high expectation is possible.

  Here, since the colored light transmission plate 88 has a function of attenuating the red wavelength range and attenuating the blue-green wavelength range that is the opposite color of red, the second movable part 550a behind continues white. When light is emitted in the order of red, orange, yellow, green, blue, blue, and purple, the colored light transmission plate 88 is colored in the order of red followed by red, light red, orange, red, purple, dark red, and dark purple. appear. That is, when the color of the background changes to seven colors, the colored light transmitting plate 88 in the middle appears to emit light mainly in the red system. In particular, even if the background color changes from white to red, the colored light transmitting plate 88 looks red and hardly changes in color, so the color of the colored light transmitting plate 88 does not change even if the background color changes significantly Looks like. In addition, when the background color changes to red, orange, yellow, and green, the colored light transmitting plate 88 changes to red, bright red, orange, and red. Although the change can be enjoyed, although the background color is greatly changed from red to green, the colored light-transmissive plate 88 looks like a shade centered on red. Then, in the process of changing the background color to green, blue, green, and purple, the colored light transmission plate 88 changes to red, purple, dark red, and dark purple, and in the second half, the color is mainly dark red. Because it changes to red, it becomes a color (hue) with a feeling of calm compared to the first half that changes to red, bright red, orange, and red following red.

  That is, assuming that the process of changing the background color to white followed by red, orange, yellow and green is the first half and the process of changing the background color to green, blue, blue and purple is the second half. The player can recognize the difference between the first half and the second half because the first half looks like a bright red system color and the second half looks like a dark red system color.

  In addition, the aspect of the hue of the colored light transmission plate 88 changing to red, bright red, orange, red, purple, dark red, and dark purple following red is different from the light emission aspect of the second movable part 550 a Thus, the upper rendering unit 40c is emphasized.

  As described above, the colored light transmitting plate 88 changes depending on the color tone different from the change of the background color, and by providing the distinction between the front half and the rear half, the upper rendering unit 40c and the second movable part 550a produces an effect that is emphasized alternately. Then, the player's attention can be drawn to both the upper rendering unit 40c and the second movable role object 550a, and the player can be made aware of the development of the rendering related to the rainbow rendering.

  Next, unevenness such as light and dark of the colored light transmitting plate 88 will be described. FIG. 127 is a side view of a colored light transmitting plate 88 and a second movable part 550a of Modification 2 of the first embodiment. Here, it will be described how the light emitted from the second movable part 550 a looks in front of the colored light transmitting plate 88. The light of the LED is spread as it is separated from the light source, but for the convenience of explanation, it is shown as a linear arrow, and L1, L2 and L3 are sequentially from the top.

  A gear box is formed between the second movable role back base 551 and the second movable role middle base 565, and between the second movable role middle base 565 and the second movable role front base 570. The LED substrate 568 is disposed.

  The colored light transmitting plate 88 has an effect of absorbing and diffusing light due to the coloring component, and thus has an effect of diffusing the LED light in the colored light transmitting plate 88 itself to make it look bright. Then, the LED lights L1, L2, and L3 will be described.

  The LED light L 1 passes through the decorative rotating body 583 d and further passes through the colored light transmitting plate 88, but is diffused by the decorative rotating body 583 d before passing through the colored light transmitting plate 88. It is visually recognized as diffused light at the front.

  The LED light L2 passes through the decorative rotating body 585e and the decorative rotating body 581c and passes through the colored light transmitting plate 88, but is diffused by the two decorative rotating bodies, so the light is diffused strongly in front of the colored light transmitting plate 88 As visible light. In particular, since the decorative rotating body 581c has a shape that bulges outward, the diffusion function is strong, and the LED light L2 is largely diffused.

  The LED light L3 passes through the colored light transmitting plate 88 but is diffused only by the diffusion function of the colored light transmitting plate 88 and is not diffused as strongly as L1 and L2.

  As described above, the colored light transmitting plate 88 does not appear to be illuminated with uniform brightness, but is viewed with uneven brightness, and furthermore, uneven brightness is moved by the rotation of the decorative rotating body 581 c or the like. . Since the decorative rotator and the like are not completely circular, part of the light may or may not pass through the decorative rotator by rotation.

  For this reason, since the colored light transmitting plate 88 is accompanied by the uneven brightness with motion in addition to the change of the hue based on the change of the color of the background color, a complex color or pattern including marble tone or gradation It looks like it emits light.

  Further, due to the diffusion effect of the colored components of the colored light transmitting plate 88, the entire colored light transmitting plate 88 appears to emit light even when a small amount of light is incident. Here, if the colored light transmitting plate 88 is simply made to have a diffusing effect, it is possible to obtain the diffusing effect by providing an edge on the surface or the back surface of the colored light transmitting plate 88 to provide a plurality of fine peaks and valleys. However, when doing so, the rear second movable character 550a looks blurry and can not be clearly seen. Therefore, the colored light transmitting plate 88 is configured as a flat plate so that the effect member installed in the rear can be viewed clearly. Then, the colored light transmitting plate 88 appears to emit light in a shade different from the background color depending on the coloring component, and the entire colored light transmitting plate 88 appears to emit light even if a small amount of light is incident due to the diffusion effect ( Even with a small amount of light, the titles of gaming machines can be fully viewed.

  Next, an example of a game effect by the colored light transmitting plate 88 will be described. FIG. 128 is a front view of the vicinity of the display device 41 and the colored light transmitting plate 88 according to the modification 2 of the first embodiment. (A) is a state of one starting memory, (B) is a state where a second starting memory having a high degree of expectation is generated.

  In (A), the variable display game is being executed, and although the starting memory M1 is generated, since it is not the starting memory of the prefetch target, it is displayed in the normal mode. At this time, since the second movable part 550a does not emit light, the colored light transmitting plate 88 also does not emit light.

  (B) is a state where the starting memory M2 which is the target of the prefetching with high expectation is generated. Here, the pattern of the cherry blossoms appears in the starting memory M2, and it is informed that the degree of expectation of the starting memory M2 is high. In addition, the second movable character 550a and the third movable character 600a emit light in the form of an arch at the timing when the cherry blossom pattern appears in the starting memory M2, and the colored light transmitting plate 88 also emits light. ing.

  Here, the height of the expectation of the starting memory M2 can be reported based on the relationship between the color of the pre-read effect of the starting memory M2 and the color seen through the colored light transmission plate 88, for example, starting When both the memory M2 and the colored light transmitting plate 88 emit light in orange, an effect of notifying that the degree of expectation is very high is possible.

  Further, it is also possible to notify the pre-reading of the pre-reading effect by the luminescent color of the colored light transmitting plate 88. Specifically, for example, before the start-up memory M2 emits light in orange, the second movable part 550a emits light in yellow and effects are produced such that the colored light transmitting plate 88 appears to emit light in orange. In this effect, the colored light transmitting plate 88 notifies that the start memory M2 has a very high degree of expectation, which is a start memory having a very high degree of expectation for the start memory M2, and raises the attention for the upper effect unit 40c. be able to.

  In addition, when the cherry blossom pattern is displayed in the starting memory M2, only the decorative rotating body 581c disposed on the back surface of the colored light transmitting plate 88 may emit light, and may be visible through the colored light transmitting plate 88. The decorative rotating member 581c disposed on the back surface of the colored light transmitting plate 88 emits light, so that the decoration rotation is a decorative member on which the pre-reading effect in the starting memory and the same cherry blossom pattern as the cherry blossom displayed in the starting memory The body 351 can be interlocked, and the synergetic effect of the pre-reading effect to the start memory and the light-emitting effect of the movable role (decorative rotating body 351) improves the interest of the game.

  In addition, as a notification mode of pre-reading effect in starting memory, there is also a mode where the petals of the cherry blossoms in the starting memory display, and a mode where the petals of the cherry blossoms around the starting memory display, it is a starting memory with high expectation. Inform.

[Effects of Modification 2 of First Embodiment]
As described above, in the second modification of the first embodiment, the colored light transmitting plate 88 is changed by the hue different from the change of the background color, so that the change of the contrast with the surrounding color and the hue becomes a novel effect. Improve the fun of gaming.

  In addition, since the colored light transmitting plate 88 is accompanied by the uneven brightness with motion in addition to the change of the color tone based on the change of the color of the background color, the complex light color and pattern including marble tone and gradation are It looks luminous.

  In addition, since the colored light transmitting plate 88 has a filter effect, it has a function of reducing the intensity of light emitted by the second movable part 550a, and can reduce the player's feeling of glare in front view. In addition, since it is possible to cut light that may adversely affect human eyes (for example, blue light of LED), it is possible to provide eye-friendly directing light.

  Moreover, since the colored light transmission plate 88 is a flat plate and has a diffusion effect of light due to the coloring component, it is possible to visually recognize the rear of the colored light transmission plate 88 in a clear manner. Since the entire light transmitting plate 88 appears to emit light, the title of the gaming machine can be sufficiently viewed.

  In addition, the colored light transmission plate 88 can be provided to notify the height of the degree of expectation by the hue of the colored light transmission plate 88 prior to the pre-reading effect for the start memory display etc. It can enhance the interest of the game.

  Further, since the colored light transmitting plate 88 is obtained by coloring the light transmitting plate, it can be installed easily and at low cost, and becomes a cost-effective rendering member.

[One embodiment of the present invention]
The following inventions can be mentioned as inventions relating to the effect by the coloring different from the background color by the colored light transmitting plate 88 described so far.

  (20) In a gaming machine capable of executing a game based on the establishment of a predetermined start condition, a first translucent member having translucency, and a color provided on the front of the first translucent member and colored And a light emitting source provided behind the first light transmitting member, and the first light transmitting member is formed of a light from the light emitting source. The second light-transmissive member is decorated in one decoration mode, and is decorated in a second decoration mode different from the first decoration mode by the light from the light source via the first light-transmissive member. A game machine characterized by

  (21) The first light-transmissive member is operable in response to the progress of the game, and the action can be viewed through the second light-transmissive member (20 The gaming machine described in).

  In the invention described in (20) to (21) above, the “first translucent member” is, for example, the second movable part 550 a. The “colored second light transmitting member” is, for example, a colored light transmitting plate 88. Further, the “light emission source” is, for example, an LED provided on the LED substrate 568.

  Moreover, a "1st decoration aspect" is a decoration aspect light-emitted by the same hue as LED light. The “second decoration mode” is a decoration mode in which light is emitted with a hue different from that of the background color (emission color of the first light transmissive member).

(Modification 3 of the first embodiment)
In the second modification of the first embodiment, a colored light transmitting plate 88, which is a light transmitting member, is provided on the front surface of the upper effect unit 40c. On the other hand, in the modified example 3 of the first embodiment, the frequency changing member 89 to which the fluorescent agent is added is a translucent member colored on the front surface of the upper effect unit 40c.

  The frequency changer 89 changes the wavelength of light. The light-transmissive member to which the fluorescent agent is added has a function of lengthening the wavelength, and when the purple light is emitted from the rear, the light-transmissive member looks blue with a wavelength longer than that of purple. It is possible. It is known that the degree of change of wavelength can be adjusted by the concentration of the fluorescent agent.

  FIG. 129 is a front view of the game board of Modification 3 of the first embodiment. It differs from FIGS. 2 and 125 in that a frequency change member 89 is provided on the front surface of the upper effect unit 40c. In the present modification, the frequency changing member 89 is provided in place of the colored light transmitting plate 88 in the upper effect unit 40c.

  The frequency changing member 89 has a function of lengthening the wavelength of light received from the rear. Specifically, when the purple LED light is received, the frequency changing member 89 looks amber. In addition, when the amber LED light is received, the frequency changing member 89 looks blue. In addition, when the blue LED light is received, the frequency change member 89 looks green. In addition, when the green LED light is received, the frequency change member 89 looks yellow. Also, when the yellow LED light is received, the frequency change member 89 looks orange. Further, when the orange LED light is received, the frequency change member 89 looks red. In addition, when the red LED light is received, the frequency change member 89 looks dark red (garnet).

  Therefore, when the second movable character 550a and the third movable character 600a emit light in the order of purple, blue, green, yellow, orange and red, the frequency changing member 89 is blue, green, yellow, orange, It appears that light is emitted in the order of red and dark red. That is, the frequency changing member 89 appears to emit light in one color earlier than the color of the background.

  In the colored light transmitting plate 88 when the coloring component is red, even though the background color changes to seven colors, the colored light transmitting plate 88 appears to emit light in a hue centered on the red system color, but the frequency change In the member 89, since it is possible to emit light in seven hues, decoration with a larger change in hue than the colored light transmitting plate 88 is possible.

[Effects of Modification 3 of First Embodiment]
As described above, in the third modification of the first embodiment, since the frequency changing member 89 for lengthening the wavelength of light from behind is provided, light emission with a wavelength longer than that of the second movable part 550 a is emitted. It is possible to make the contrast between the second movable role object 550a and the upper rendering unit 40c stand out.

  Further, when the second movable part 550a changes the emission color sequentially from light having a short wavelength to light having a long wavelength, the frequency changing member 89 causes the light having a short wavelength to precede the second movable part 550a. Since it changes in color in order from the light of long wavelength to light and it looks that it emits light, the interest of a game can be heightened.

  Moreover, since the frequency change member 89 is obtained by coloring the light transmitting plate and adding the fluorescent agent, it can be installed easily and at low cost, and becomes a cost-effective effect member.

[One embodiment of the present invention]
The following inventions can be mentioned as inventions relating to effects by color development different from the background color by the frequency change member 89 described above.

(22) A gaming machine capable of executing a game based on establishment of a predetermined starting condition, comprising: a first translucent member having a translucent property; and a light provided in front of the first translucent member; And a light emitting source provided behind the first light transmitting member, wherein the first light transmitting member is a light from the light emitting source. The second decorative member is decorated in a first decoration mode by light, and the second light transmitting member is in a second decoration mode different from the first decoration mode by light from the light emitting source through the first light transmitting member A gaming machine characterized by being decorated.

  In the invention described in the above (22), the "first translucent member" is, for example, a second movable part 550a. Also, the “second light transmitting member for increasing the wavelength of light” is, for example, the frequency changing member 98. Further, the “light emission source” is, for example, an LED provided on the LED substrate 568.

  Moreover, a "1st decoration aspect" is a decoration aspect light-emitted by the same hue as LED light. The “second decoration mode” is a decoration mode in which light is emitted with a hue different from the background color (the decoration mode of the first light transmitting member) by the action of the fluorescent agent.

(Modification 4 of the first embodiment)
In the fourth modification of the first embodiment, a structural feature is provided to the special variation winning device 39 in which the game ball with strong flow-down force collides, and when the open / close member 39c is in the open state, the game ball can win vigorously When the opening and closing member 39c is in the closed state, the flow of the game ball is weakened and the game ball can be effectively guided to the game area 32 in which the spread gate (passing portion) 34 and the like are disposed. did.

  FIG. 130 is an enlarged front view of the right central portion of the game board 30 in the closed state of the special fluctuation winning device 39 of the fourth modification of the first embodiment, and FIG. 131 is a special view of the fourth modification of the first embodiment. FIG. 17 is an enlarged front view of the right central portion of the game board 30 when the fluctuation winning device 39 is in the open state. FIG. 132 is an enlarged front view of the opening / closing member 39c excluding the decoration of the cherry blossoms of the modification 4 of the first embodiment.

  Among the game balls that have been strongly hit (specially hit) with strong launch, the game balls that did not win the general winning opening 35 flow down the six-step flow path 40d. The six-stage flow path 40d is provided on the left and right continuous flow path walls with a first top 43a, a second top 43b, a third top 43c, a fourth top 43d, a fifth top 43e, and a sixth top 43f. And a bottom formed between the first top 43a and the third top 43c; a bottom formed between the second top 43b and the fourth top 43d; a third top 43c and a fifth top 43e; 130. A meandering channel in which six meandering paths shown by curved arrows in FIG. 130 are continuously formed by the bottom formed between the fourth top and the bottom formed between the fourth top 43d and the sixth top 43f. It is.

  All of these six meandering paths make the movement of the gaming ball in the lateral direction by the meandering flow path to make the player enjoy the movement of the gaming ball. Among these, the gaming ball in the vicinity of the sixth top 43f increases its flow down while flowing down the six-stage flow path 40d, and flows down toward the opening and closing member 39c facing the sixth top 43f with a strong flow down. A plate-like decoration is provided in front of the curved portions on the right side and the left side of the six-stage flow path 40d, and the gaming ball can flow down the back side of the decoration.

  The inlet of the six-stage flow passage 40d is formed by the first inlet formed by the left side surface of the general winning opening 35 and the first top 43a, and the right side surface of the general winning opening 35 and the second top 43b. There are two inlets with a second inlet. After that, one flow path without branching is formed, and the outlet of the six-stage flow path 40d is a region connecting the fifth top 43e and the sixth top 43f, and is one outlet. And the opening-and-closing member 39c is provided in the position which opposes the exit of the 6-step flow path 40d as a length direction (up-down direction).

  The six-step flow path 40d extends the flow-down time of the gaming ball by flowing the gaming ball largely in the lateral direction, and serves as a flow path that shows the player the movement in the lateral direction. You can enjoy the way you do (flowing down). Also, it is a flow path that makes it so difficult to hit so-called timing hitting method by aiming only at the opening time of the big winning opening.

  Then, when the opening and closing member 39c is in the closed state, the gaming ball having flowed down the six-step flow path 40d collides with the side surface of the opening and closing member 39c, and the game area of the common drawing gate (passing portion) 34 or lower Flow down to 32 (downward flow path).

  When the opening and closing member 39 c is in the open state, the gaming ball having flowed down the six-step flow path 40 d can win a prize for the special fluctuation winning device 39. At this time, a width larger than the diameter of the gaming ball is formed between the opening / closing member 39c (the first corner 39u) and the sixth top 43f (width W of the double-headed arrow in FIG. 131). A part of the gaming balls having flowed down the stage flow path 40d flows to the common drawing gate (passing portion) 34 or the gaming area 32 further below without winning in the special variation winning device 39.

  Here, the structure of the opening and closing member 39c will be described in detail with reference to FIG.

  The opening and closing member 39c is a member having a fixed depth, and a wing cross-sectional shape which is odd in front view. The side surface of the opening / closing member 39c is sandwiched between the two long sides facing each other, one short side interposed between the two long sides, and the one short side facing the one short side. It consists of one semi-circular side. The opening and closing member 39c is set such that the semicircular side is an axis, and the length direction is the vertical direction (vertical direction), and the upper part can be opened and closed. The linear shape of each side portion is not limited to a straight line, and includes those having a bulge or a peak, a dent, a curved surface, a plurality of slopes, and a wave.

  The side surface of the opening / closing member 39c includes an upper side 39j, a lower side 39k, a right side 39l, and a left side 39m. Among them, the right side portion 39l uses the second corner portion (connection portion) 39v as a water dividing pot, and the first oblique side portion (flow path side short side portion, short side portion) 39o and the second oblique side portion (flow path side long side portion, long side) Part) 39p. Further, the left side 39m is a third oblique side 39q and a fourth oblique side 39r having the fourth corner 39x as a water divider, and a fifth oblique side 39s and a sixth oblique side 39t having the fifth corner 39y as a divider. And. The lower side 39k is an arc-shaped side portion in a front view. The right side portion 39l and the left side portion 39m correspond to the above two opposing long sides, and the upper side 39j corresponds to one short side sandwiched between the two long sides. Further, the arc-shaped lower side portion 39 k corresponds to a semicircular side portion which is sandwiched between the two long sides and faces the one short side.

  Of the lower side 39k, the flow path side (right side, belly side) is connected to the second oblique side (long side) 39p, and the lower winning side 39k (large left side, back side) is connected It is connected to the sixth oblique side 39t.

  Further, the opening and closing member 39c includes five corners of a first corner 39u, a second corner (channel side corner) 39v, a third corner 39w, a fourth corner 39x, and a fifth corner 39y, And, one depression 39z is formed. The depressed portion 39z is formed on the large winning opening side (back side) of the opening / closing member 39c, and serves as a connection portion between the fourth oblique side 39r and the fifth oblique side 39s. Each of the five corner portions is an acute angle (0 to θ to 90 °) or an obtuse angle (90 to θ to 180 °), and the inner angle of the recess 39z is a superior angle (180 to θ to 360 °). It is.

  The upper side 39j between the first corner 39u and the third corner 39w, and the first oblique side (shorter) 39o between the first corner 39u and the second corner 39v are substantially linear. Is formed. The upper side 39j forms a funnel-shaped flow path with the sixth top 43f when the opening and closing member 39c is opened (see FIG. 131), and the short side (first oblique side) 39o is an opening of the opening and closing member 39c At the same time, an eight-shaped (end-spreading) channel is formed between the sixth top portion 43f and the channel wall that slopes downward toward the right side (see FIG. 131).

  The third oblique side 39 q, the fourth oblique side 39 r, the fifth oblique side 39 s, and the sixth oblique side 39 t, which constitute the left side 39 m, are formed substantially linearly, and the fourth oblique side 39 r and the fifth oblique side 39 s Are both formed in a downward slope toward the recess 39z. When the opening and closing member 39c is opened, the third oblique side 39s and the fourth oblique side 39r are inclined to the lower left, so they collide with the flow path wall 39g below the fifth top 39e (see FIG. 131) Guide the game ball of the flow going out of the mouth into the big winning opening. In particular, since the fourth oblique side 39r has a large inclination angle to the lower left, the guiding effect to the large winning opening is high. In addition, since the fourth oblique side 39r and the fifth oblique side 39s form a recess, the gaming ball that flows down directly onto the opening / closing member 39c from the six-step flow path 40d without contacting the flow path wall 39g Lead to

  Then, when the open / close member 39c is in the closed state, the third corner 39w abuts on the center case (game effect structure) 40 to close the special winning opening of the special variation winning device 39.

  The long side portion (second oblique side portion) 39p is formed with a gently concave recess, and the concave shape weakens the flow-down force of the game ball colliding with the open / close member 39c in the closed state and Depending on the shape, the flowing direction of the gaming ball is changed, and the gaming ball is guided to the common drawing gate (passing portion) 34 disposed below the long side portion 39p.

  In addition, although the decoration of a plate-like cherry blossom pattern is provided in the front (surface on the player side) in the opening and closing member 39c, the game ball collides with the part projecting out from the main body of the opening and closing member 39c in the decoration. Also, the long side portion (second oblique side portion) 39p on the back side of the part that has come out is configured to receive the flow of the game ball from the front.

  Further, since the long side portion (second oblique side portion) 39p is a portion where the game ball having strong flow-down that has flowed down the six-step flow path 40d collides, even if an impact absorbing material such as rubber or silicon is stuck You may be equipped with the uneven | corrugated | grooved part which reduces the ball power of a game ball.

  Next, the decoration movable member 639 will be described with reference to FIGS. 130 and 131.

  The decoration movable member 639 is an effect member that operates in conjunction with the opening / closing member 39c, and is a member capable of causing the player to recognize the opening of the big winning opening without visually recognizing the big winning opening. The decoration movable member 639 shown in FIG. 130 is in the state at the initial position (first position), is in contact with the center case 40, and is substantially upright.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 131, the operation position (the first position on the front side of the display device 41) corresponding to the movement of the opening / closing member 39c other than the short opening (conversion operation to the open state) Turn to 2). That is, the initial position of the decorative member 639 is a position overlapping the display area near the edge of the display device 41. The operating position is on the front center side of the display device 41.

  The pivoting direction of the decorative movable member 639 to the operating position is counterclockwise opposite to the pivoting direction of the opening / closing member 39c. In FIG. 130 and FIG. 131, when the vertical line V1 provided for convenience is taken as the center line, the decoration movable member 639 is guided by the guide groove 639g, and the opening / closing member 39c is guided by the guide groove 39g. It is possible to move. At this time, the angle between the decoration movable member 639 and the opening / closing member 39c is about 90 °. The decoration movable member 639 and the opening and closing member 39 c may be provided such that the center line of the decoration movable member 639 and the opening and closing member 39 c corresponds to the end of the display device 41.

  Similar to the opening and closing member 39c, the decoration movable member 639 is a mechanism that pivots with the lower portion as the shaft, but the movement of the opening and closing member 39c is controlled by the game control apparatus 100, while the decoration movable member 639 produces effects The operation is controlled by the controller 300.

  The decoration movable member 639 rotates so as to synchronize with the rotation movement of the opening / closing member 39c, but the decoration movable member 639 operates under predetermined conditions such as small hitting or short opening (opening time less than 1 second) It does not turn to the position (that is, it is not synchronized with the turning operation of the opening and closing member 39c). Such control is executed based on the determination (B1504 in FIG. 114) as to whether or not the MODE portion of the command received by the effect control device 300 is a round.

  Both the decoration movable member 639 and the opening and closing member 39c may be controlled by the game control apparatus 100. Further, both the decoration movable member 639 and the opening / closing member 39c may be operated by one drive source (for example, the special winning opening solenoid 39b).

  The decorative movable member 639 is a member positioned closer to the center of the display device 41 than the special variation winning device 39. Therefore, the player can recognize that the open / close member 39c is in the open state by moving the decoration movable member 639 to the operation position which is the front of the display device 41 while viewing the display device 41. Further, when the decoration movable member 639 is in the initial position, the player can recognize that the open / close member 39c is in the closed state or in the short open state.

  In other words, even if the player visually recognizes the effect displayed on the display screen, the decorative movable member 639 can simultaneously recognize the effect content and the open state of the open / close member 39c. Therefore, it is possible to minimize the movement of the player's line of sight in the special gaming state, and to effectively reduce the burden on the player and immerse in the special gaming state.

  In addition, since the drive source of the decorative movable member 639 and the drive source (large winning opening solenoid 39b) of the opening / closing member 39 are provided in proximity to or adjacent to each other, the decorative movable member 639 does not operate synchronously when the short opening. By doing this, it is possible to prevent in advance the failure or failure due to the heat generation of the two drive sources.

  Next, the positional relationship of the opening and closing member 39c will be described. FIG. 133A is an enlarged front view of the right side central portion of the game board 30 in the closed state of the special variation winning device 39 of the modification 4 of the first embodiment. Further, FIG. 133B is an enlarged front view of the right side central portion of the game board 30 when the special fluctuation winning device 39 of the modified example 4 of the first embodiment is in the open state.

  In FIG. 133A, the horizontal line H10 is a line indicating the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 when the decorative movable member 639 is in the initial position (first position), and the horizontal line H20 is when the open / close member 39c is closed. It is a line which shows the height of the 2nd corner 39v (channel side corner 39v). The horizontal line H30 is a line indicating the height of the sixth top 43f, and the horizontal line H40 is a line indicating the height of the shaft of the opening / closing member 39c. Note that the decoration movable member 639 may be provided such that the height of the upper end of the decoration movable member 639 in the initial position corresponds to the center line with respect to the lateral direction of the display device 41. In this case, the horizontal line H10 passes through the central portion in the vertical direction of the display device 41. Further, the decoration movable member 639 may be provided such that the height of the upper end of the decoration movable member 639 in the initial position corresponds to the upper end of the display device 41. In this case, the upper side of the display device 41 and the horizontal line H10 overlap.

  Further, in FIG. 133A, the broken arrow h1 whose both ends are black indicates the difference with the height of the sixth top 43f based on the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the initial position, and both ends are black The solid-line arrow h2 indicates the difference from the height of the second corner 39v of the open / close member 39 in the closed state, based on the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the initial position. In addition, the broken arrow h3 having white outlines at both ends indicates the difference from the height of the sixth top 43f with reference to the height of the pivot of the opening / closing member 39, and the solid arrow h4 having white outlines indicates The difference from the height of the second corner 39v of the open / close member 39 in the closed state is shown based on the height of the pivot shaft of the open / close member 39.

  As shown in FIG. 133A, when the open / close member 39c is in the closed state, the second corner 39v faces the sixth top 43f, and the height (H20) of the second corner 39v is the sixth top 43f. It becomes a position higher than height (H30).

  Further, regarding the relationship between the height of the second corner 39v and the height of the sixth top 43f when the open / close member 39 is in the closed state, assuming the height (H10) of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the initial position as a reference. It is illustrated that the arrow h1 is longer than the arrow h2. That is, based on the difference (h2) between the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the initial position and the height of the second corner 39v when the open / close member 39 is closed, the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the initial position There is a relation (h1> h2) in which the height and the height of the sixth top portion 43f and the difference (h1) are larger.

  In addition, regarding the relationship between the height of the second corner 39v and the sixth top 43f when the opening and closing member 39 is in the closed state, the arrow h4 is based on the height (H40) of the rotation axis of the opening and closing member 39. It is illustrated that the length of the arrow h3 is shorter than that. That is, the height of the rotation shaft of the opening and closing member 39 and the sixth top portion 43f are more than the difference (h4) between the height of the rotation axis of the opening and closing member 39 and the height of the second corner 39v when the opening and closing member 39 is open. The difference (h3) with respect to the height of h is smaller (h3 <h4).

  Next, referring to FIG. 133B, the height of the second corner 39v and the sixth top 43f in comparison with the case where the opening / closing member 39 and the decoration movable member 639 are in the initial position and in the operation position. Explain the relationship. The heights indicated by horizontal line H10, horizontal line H20, horizontal line H30, and horizontal line H40 in FIG. 133B, and the differences indicated by arrow h1, arrow h2, arrow h3, and arrow h4 are the same as those in FIG. 133A.

  In FIG. 133B, the horizontal line H11 is a line indicating the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 when the decorative movable member 639 is in the operating position (second position), and the horizontal line H21 is when the opening / closing member 39c is open It is a line which shows the height of the 2nd corner 39v (channel side corner 39v).

  The broken arrow h1 'filled with black at both ends indicates the difference from the height of the sixth top 43f based on the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the operating position, and both ends are solid blacked The arrow h2 'indicates the difference with the height of the second corner 39v of the open / close member 39 based on the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the operating position. In addition, a solid-line arrow h4 'in which both ends are white indicates the difference with the height of the second corner 39v of the open / close member 39 based on the height of the pivot shaft of the open / close member 39.

  As shown in FIG. 133B, when the open / close member 39c is in the open state, the height (H21) of the second corner 39v is lower than the height (H30) of the sixth top 43f.

  Further, regarding the relationship between the height of the second corner 39v and the height of the sixth top 43f when the opening and closing member 39 is in the open state, the height (H11) of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the operating position is taken as a reference. It is illustrated that the arrow h1 'is shorter than the arrow h2'. That is, the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the operating position is more than the difference (h2 ') between the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 in the operating position and the height of the second corner 39v when the opening / closing member 39 is open. And the height of the sixth top portion 43f and the difference (h1 ′) are smaller (h1 ′ <h2 ′).

  The magnitude relationship is reversed when this magnitude relationship (h1 '<h2') is compared with the relationship (h1> h2) described in FIG. 133A. That is, the difference between the height of the second corner 39v and the height of the sixth top 43f relative to the height of the upper end of the decoration movable member 639 when the opening / closing member 39 and the decoration movable member 639 are at the initial position. And the height of the second corner 39v with reference to the height of the upper end of the decoration movable member 639 when the opening / closing member 39 and the decoration movable member 639 are in the operating position. The relationship between the difference and the difference between the height of the sixth top 43 f (h 1 ′ <h 2 ′) is opposite.

  And since the maximum turning angle of the opening / closing member 39 and the decoration movable member 639 is the same, h2 'and h2 have the same length, but since the sixth top 43f is a fixed part, h1' It is shorter than h1. When the opening / closing member 39 and the decoration movable member 639 rotate to the operating position, there is no change in the difference between the height of the upper end of the decoration movable member 639 and the height of the second corner 39v (h2 → h2 ′) Since the difference between the height of the upper end of the decorative movable member 639 and the height of the sixth top 43 f is greatly reduced (h1 → h1 ′), an effect of visually feeling that it is easy to enter the big winning opening is generated. .

  In addition, when the opening and closing member 39 and the decoration movable member 639 rotate to the operating position, the height of the upper end of the decoration movable member 639 and the height of the sixth top 43f to h1 ′ <h1 with respect to h2 ′ = h2. In addition to the reduction of the difference of h, the reverse of the difference of height from h1> h2 to h1 ′ <h2 ′ guides the gaze of the player to the big winning opening.

  Regarding the relationship between the height of the second corner 39v and the height of the sixth top 43f when the opening and closing member 39 is in the open state, based on the height (H40) of the pivot shaft of the opening and closing member 39, according to arrow h4 '. It is illustrated that the length of the arrow h3 is also long. That is, the height of the rotation shaft of the opening and closing member 39 and the sixth top portion are more than the difference (h4 ') between the height of the rotation axis of the opening and closing member 39 and the height of the second corner 39v when the opening and closing member 39 is open. The difference (h3) with respect to the height 43f is larger (h3> h4 ′).

  The magnitude relationship becomes opposite when this magnitude relationship (h3> h4 ') is compared with the relationship (h3 <h4) described in FIG. 133A. That is, the difference between the height of the second corner 39v and the height of the sixth top 43f based on the height of the pivot of the opening / closing member 39 when the opening / closing member 39 and the decoration movable member 639 are at the initial position. And the height of the second corner 39v relative to the height of the pivot shaft of the opening and closing member 39 when the opening and closing member 39 and the decoration movable member 639 are in the operating position. The relationship (h3> h4 ') of the difference between the difference in height and the height of the sixth top portion 43f is opposite.

  Then, when the opening and closing member 39 and the decoration movable member 639 rotate to the operating position, there is no change in the difference (h3) between the height of the rotation axis of the opening and closing member 39 and the height of the sixth top 43f. Since the difference between the height of the pivot shaft of the opening and closing member 39 and the height of the second corner 39v of the opening and closing member 39 is greatly reduced (h4 → h4 ′), it is easy to visually enter the winning opening It produces an effect that

  Also, when the opening and closing member 39 and the decoration movable member 639 rotate to the operating position, there is no change in h3 and the difference in height between the rotation axis of the opening and closing member 39 and the second corner 39v from h4 to h4 ' In addition to the large reduction of H, the reverse of the difference in height from h3 <h4 to h3> h4 'guides the player's gaze to the big winning opening.

  Here, the open / close member 39c when in the closed state can guide the game ball having strong flow-down that collides from the side direction to almost directly downward by the long side 39p (guide to the common gate 34), It is a benefit of the player in the specific gaming state. Therefore, by positioning the flow path side corner portion 39v, which is one end of the long side portion 39p, at a position higher than the sixth top portion 43f forming the final corner of the six-stage flow path 40d, the six-stage flow path 40d flows down. The game ball can be effectively guided to the vicinity of the drawing gate (passing portion) 34. That is, the gaming balls flowing down the six-stage flow path 40d can be brought into contact with the long side portion 39p as much as possible, and can be guided to the vicinity of the common gate (passage portion) 34.

  On the other hand, when the open / close member 39c is arranged at a high position so that the second corner (connecting portion) 39v is as high as possible, the winning opening is the lower limit of the outlet of the six-step flow path 40d (that is, Since the height is higher than the height of the six tops 43f), the ratio of gaming balls to be awarded to the big winning opening decreases when the opening and closing member 39c is opened, which causes the interest of the game to be reduced. Then, if the opening angle of the opening and closing member 39c is increased in order to avoid the situation, the operation of the small opening or the short opening becomes short.

  Therefore, it is an opening amount (rotation amount of the opening and closing member 39c) at which the short opening operation can be smoothly performed, which is an opening angle at which the winning amount to the special winning opening is appropriate, and when the opening and closing member 39c is closed The second corner portion 39v, which is the top on the flow path side provided on the opening / closing member 39c, is a flow path provided as a balance point that can enhance the fun of the game as much as possible by effectively guiding the game ball flowing down from In order to solve the problem of the present invention, the invention of making it higher than the sixth top (lowermost top) 43f provided at the lowermost part of the present invention has been devised.

  The long side portion 39p is formed from the vicinity of the rotation axis of the opening / closing member 39c to the second corner portion (connection portion) 39v. Therefore, the long side portion 39p is provided at the lowermost portion of the six-step flow path 40d as the balance point. It is also possible to specify that the opening and closing member 39c is provided such that the top 43f is located at a height between the connecting portion 39v of the opening and closing member 39c in the closed state and the pivot axis of the opening and closing member 39c. .

  Further, since the long side 39p can be formed up to the vicinity of the top of the opening / closing member 39c (near the upper side 39j) without providing the connecting portion 39v, when the opening / closing member 39c is closed as the above balance point. The top of the opening and closing member 39c is higher than the lower limit of the outlet of the six-stage flow path 40d (that is, the sixth top 43f), and the top of the opening and closing member 39c is the six-stage flow path 40d when the opening and closing member 39c is opened. It is also possible to specify that it is arranged to be lower than the lower limit (that is, the sixth top 43f) of the outlet of the (see FIGS. 130 and 131).

[Effects of Modification 4 of First Embodiment]
As described above, in the fourth modification of the first embodiment, the player can enjoy the movement of the gaming ball by providing a plurality of corners (serpent paths) that meander greatly and causing the balls to flow largely in the lateral direction as well. In addition, the game ball can be guided to the blowout gate (passing portion) 34 substantially directly downward by the special fluctuation winning device 39 in the closed state at the exit of the meander path.

  In particular, since the connection 39v provided on the flow path side of the special fluctuation winning device 39 is located at a position higher than the sixth top 43f provided at the lowermost part of the meandering path, the length extended downward from the connection 39v A large number of gaming balls can be made to collide with the side portions 39p, and the gaming balls flowing down from the lateral direction can be effectively induced in the vertical direction (downward flow path).

[One embodiment of the present invention]
The following inventions can be mentioned as inventions for guiding the game balls flowing down from the lateral direction by flowing down the meandering path described so far in the vertical direction effectively by the special variation winning device.

  (23) A gaming machine provided with a flow path through which a game ball can flow, provided with a variable winning device having an opening / closing member capable of converting between an open state and a closed state, and one side of the opening / closing member facing the flow path A long side portion, a short side portion connected to the long side portion, and a connection portion disposed between the long side portion and the short side portion, and the flow path is a game ball And a projection having a top at which the game ball can come into contact with the tip, and the top is provided at a lower position than the connection. Gaming machine.

  (24) A passing portion through which gaming balls can pass is provided downstream of the variable winning device, and the long side portion is formed with a curved surface which is recessed toward the passing portion. The gaming machine according to (23).

  In the inventions described in (23) to (24) above, the “variation winning apparatus” corresponds to, for example, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 or the special fluctuation winning apparatus 39. Further, the “long side portion” corresponds to, for example, a second oblique side portion (flow path side long side portion, long side portion) 39p. Further, the “short side portion” corresponds to, for example, a first oblique side portion (flow path side short side portion, short side portion) 39o. Further, the “connection portion” corresponds to, for example, a second corner portion (connection portion) 39v. Also, the “top” corresponds to, for example, the sixth top 43 f. Further, the “passage portion” corresponds to a common drawing gate (passage portion) 34.

  (25) A gaming machine capable of giving a gaming value to a player based on the result of a game, comprising: game control means for controlling the execution of the game; and an opening / closing member convertible to an open state and a closed state; The variable winning device controlled by the game control means, the effect control means for controlling the effect of the game, and the first position and the second position are movable, and are controlled by the effect control means A decorative movable member, wherein the decorative movable member moves from the first position to the second position when the open / close member of the fluctuation winning device is switched from the closed state to the open state, the fluctuation winning device A game machine characterized by moving from the second position to the first position when the open / close member is switched from the open state to the closed state.

  (26) Under a predetermined condition, the decorative movable member does not move from the first position to the second position even when the openable and closable member of the fluctuation winning apparatus is switched from the closed state to the open state. The gaming machine according to (25).

  In the invention described in (25) to (26) above, the “game control means” corresponds to, for example, the game control device 100. In addition, the “effect control means” corresponds to, for example, the effect control device 300. Moreover, the "decorative movable member" corresponds to, for example, a decorative movable member 639. The “first position” corresponds to, for example, an initial position. Further, the “second position” corresponds to, for example, an operation position. The "predetermined condition" corresponds to, for example, a short opening at the time of a small hit.

(Modification 5 of the first embodiment)
In the first embodiment, the rotational directions of the decorative rotary members of the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a are synchronized to rotate in the same direction (CW or CCW) in all the decorative rotary members. The On the other hand, in the fifth modification of the first embodiment, in order to attract the player's attention more, the rotation mode of a part of the decoration rotating body is made different from that of the other decoration rotating body, and a part of decoration The movement of the rotating body is not synchronized with the entire movement of the second movable part 550a and the third movable part 600a.

  FIG. 134 is an exploded perspective view of the third movable service unit 600 of the fifth modification of the first embodiment. FIG. 135 is a front view of the game board 30 according to the fifth modification of the first embodiment. FIG. 136 is a perspective view of a drive system of a decorative rotating body 635a of another example of the fifth modification of the first embodiment. FIG. 137 is a front view of the game board 30 of another example of the fifth modification of the first embodiment.

  In comparison with FIG. 12, in FIG. 134, in order not to synchronize the rotation direction of the decorative rotating body 635a with other decorative rotating bodies, the intermediate gear 612 engaged with the work gear 611 transmitting power to the decorative rotating body 635a is removed. The work gear 611 directly meshes with the drive gear 608.

  Therefore, as shown in FIG. 135, while the group of rotating decoration members (a plurality of effect members) of the third movable character 600a is being rotated clockwise by the drive of the motor 607 which is one driving source, the third Only the decorative rotating body 635a (the second effect member), which is a part of the movable character 600a, rotates counterclockwise.

  The player rotates the decorative rotating body 635a by rotating only the decorative rotating body 635a (second effect member) in the opposite direction without being synchronized with the other decorative rotating body (first effect member) of the third movable character 600a. Can draw attention to Then, since the decorative rotating body 635a is located in the vicinity of the upper right display area 263, the player's line of sight is displayed in the upper right display area 263, which is an area adjacent to the decorative rotating body 635a. The game player is guided to a display indicating how to hit the game ball, and the player can be made to recognize that it is the right-handed timing.

  Note that the decorative rotation is achieved by changing the work gear 611 for transmitting power to the decorative rotating body 635a in FIG. 12 and the intermediate gear 612 for transmitting power to the work gear 611 to the work gear 611b and the intermediate gear 612b shown in FIG. Operating the body 635a so as to synchronize with the other decorative rotating body, or not synchronizing (while the other decorative rotating body rotates continuously, some decorative rotating bodies do not rotate continuously; Stop can be repeated).

  The work gear 611 b is a gear whose thickness is thinner than that of the work gear 611, and the diameter of the gear and the number of gears are the same as the work gear 611. On the other hand, the intermediate gear 612b is thicker than the intermediate gear 612, and the teeth are arranged in two stages. In one stage, teeth are arranged around the entire circumference and engaged with the main drive gear 608. In the other stage (second stage), the teeth are arranged on a half circumference and engaged with the work gear 611b.

  With this structure, when the intermediate gear 612b makes one rotation, the second gear of the intermediate gear 612b transmits the driving force to the work gear 611b only for half a turn, and the remaining half of the second gear has teeth. The work gear 611 b is idled without meshing with the work gear 611 b. Therefore, while the other work gear 611 rotates continuously, the work gear 611 b rotates or stops rotating (or continues to rotate gently by inertia force) repeatedly, and the decoration rotating body 635 a It is possible to be accompanied by motions that are not synchronized with the decorative rotating body of the above (movements in which the rotation direction is the same but the rotation speed is different).

  As another mode of the movement in which a part of the decoration rotating body is not synchronized (a movement having the same rotation direction but different rotation speeds), in FIG. 137, an inner decoration rotating body near the display device 41 and an outer decoration It is indicated by the difference in the length of the arrow that the rotational speed with the rotating body is different. The difference in rotational speed is realized, for example, by making the diameters of the work gear and the intermediate gear for driving the inner decorative rotor different from those of the work gear and the intermediate gear for driving the outer decorative rotor.

  With this configuration, the inner decorative rotating body rotates slower than the outer decorative rotating body, so that the player's attention can be directed to the display information near the inner decorative rotating body, and the upper left display area 262 is displayed. The player's line of sight can also be guided to the displayed "after 77 times" display.

  In addition, a specific image such as a right strike or left strike strike instruction, fourth symbol, numerical display of the number of reservations, mode name, stage name, etc. may be used as display information in the vicinity of the inner decoration rotary body, near display device 41 The player's gaze is induced to these specific displays by rotating only the decoration rotating body of the wheel slowly.

  Thus, the specific decoration can be made by changing the diameters of the work gear 611 and the intermediate gear 612, or changing the number of teeth and the diameter of the second stage of the intermediate gear 612b in which two stages of teeth are disposed. It is possible to realize an operation not synchronized with the rotating body (a movement having the same rotational direction as the other decorative rotating bodies but different rotational speeds). In particular, the diameter and the number of teeth of the intermediate gear 612 or the intermediate gear 612b are determined based on the asynchronous operation mode, and the work gear 611 / intermediate gear 612 or the work gear 611b / intermediate in the gearbox The arrangement in the front-rear direction (for example, the thickness of the gear) and the left-right direction of the gear 612b (and the support hole 603 and the boss 604) is also appropriately changed.

  Up to this point, the decorative rotating body has been taken as the same kind of effect member, and the combination of the rotational direction and the rotational speed has been described as the operation mode, but as the same type of effect member, each effect member is You can cite as an example a chakrata that moves up and down.

  Specifically, the lower end of the support shaft supporting the character is in contact with the cam, and the cam is connected to the work gear 611 and the shaft, for example. The cam front is covered and decorated so that the player can not directly view the cam. The character may be visible only when the character is lifted by the cam, or the character may always be visible. At this time, it is possible to set the asynchronous operation mode of the character according to the difference in the shape of the cam, such as a character moving up and down little by little, a character moving up and down in small amounts, and a character moving up and down greatly.

  In other words, synchronized movement refers to an operation mode in which the movement direction and movement speed are in line with the other rendering members, and to an unsynchronized movement (asynchronous movement, movement in different movement modes) means movement direction and movement One of the speeds is different from the other effect members.

  Then, attracting attention of the player by causing some of the effect members of the same kind of effect members to move asynchronously is not only the transmission of display information, but also, for example, notifying the expectation of the variable display game or Also, it can be used to notify the game mode (including implicit notification), and can enhance the interest of the game as a special effect.

[Effects of Modification 5 of First Embodiment]
In this manner, by operating only a part of the effect members of the same kind driven by one drive source without synchronizing them, the player's attention is drawn to the part of the effect members. Can. Therefore, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to display information and the like around the part of the effect members.

  Further, among the same kind of effect members driven by one drive source, a part of the effect members may be operated in synchronization with the other same effect members, and an asynchronous operation not synchronized with the other same effect members. Since it is possible to operate in the aspect, it is possible to draw more attention of the player at the timing when some of the effect members operate in the asynchronous mode. Therefore, it is possible to guide the player's line of sight to display information and the like around the part of the effect members, and a special feeling is brought about operating in an asynchronous mode, thereby improving the interest of the game.

[One embodiment of the present invention]
The following inventions can be mentioned as inventions relating to the synchronous operation and the asynchronous operation in the effect member driven by one drive source described so far.

  (27) A plurality of effect members that operate based on the progress of the game, and a display device that displays an image, and the plurality of effect members include an operation mode with the first effect member and the first effect member. And a second effect member having a different type, wherein the plurality of effect members are arranged at an edge of the display device, and the display device displays a specific image in a display area adjacent to the second effect member. A game machine characterized by

  (28) The first effect member and the second effect member are operable by the drive power supplied by the same drive source, and an image showing how to hit the game ball is displayed as the specific image. The gaming machine according to (27), characterized in that

  In the inventions described in (27) to (28) above, the “plurality effect members” correspond to, for example, decorative rotating bodies. The “first effect member” corresponds to, for example, a decorative rotating body other than the decorative rotating body 635 a among the decorative rotating bodies. In addition, the “second effect member” corresponds to, for example, the decorative rotating body 635a. Further, the “display device” corresponds to, for example, the display device 41. Also, “one drive source” corresponds to, for example, the motor 557 or the motor 607. In addition, “the display area adjacent to the second effect member” corresponds to, for example, the upper right display area 263. Further, the “image showing how to hit the game ball” is, for example, an image of right-handing →.

  Further, the “operation to synchronize” corresponds to, for example, that the operating direction and the operating speed are the same, and the moving direction and the rotating direction are included in the operating direction.

  The present invention is not limited to the embodiments described above, and various modifications and alterations are possible within the scope of the technical idea, and it is apparent that they are also included in the technical scope of the present invention. It is. For example, a combination of multiple embodiments is also possible. The present invention is also applicable to gaming machines such as pachislot machines other than pachinko machines.

  Also, the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. Further, the scope of the present invention is shown not by the above description of the invention but by the scope of claims, and is intended to include all modifications within the scope of meaning and contents equivalent to the scope of claims.

10 game machine 12 front frame (play slot)
25 production button 30 game board 32 game area 34 common drawing starting gate 35 general winning a prize opening 36 1st starting winning a prize opening 37 second starting winning a prize opening 39 special fluctuation winning a prize device 40 center case 41 indicatory device 42 third starting winning a prize opening 80 lamp indication Device 88 Colored light transmitting plate 89 Frequency changing member 100 Game control device 200 Payout control device 250 Inspection device 300 Effect control device 400 Power supply device 500 1st movable part unit 550 2nd movable part unit 600 600 3rd movable part unit 650 Fourth movable role unit 680 light guide plate (first light guide plate)
683 Light guide plate (second light guide plate)
700 fifth movable role unit 825 prize change mechanism

Claims (2)

In a gaming machine provided with a flow path through which gaming balls can flow down,
A variable winning device having an opening and closing member that can be converted into an open state and a closed state;
One side surface of the opening / closing member facing the flow path side has a long side portion and a short side portion connected to the long side portion,
The flow path has a flow path wall capable of guiding gaming balls toward the opening and closing member,
The tip end of the flow path wall faces one side surface of the opening / closing member,
A space larger than the diameter of the gaming ball is formed between the tip end and the open / close member in the open state,
A game machine characterized in that the flow passage wall guides a game ball to the long side without interposing a barrier nail between the tip end and the open / close member in the closed state. A passage portion through which gaming balls can pass is provided downstream of the fluctuation winning device,
The long side portion is formed with a concave curved surface,
The gaming machine according to claim 1, wherein the curved surface guides the gaming ball toward the passage portion.